all dished up shooting tables are among the most

01_Shooting Tables 25.06.2004 12:43 Uhr Seite 7

8

Shooting table - the very word makesyou think of something bulky, furni-ture-like, complex and labor intensive.You will see, that this is not necessarilytrue.

Shooting tables are among the mostconvenient tools in photography, whenphotographing artistic set-ups or smallobjects. Professionals have longknown this. The classic shooting tableor a similar construction of stands,background paper and a horizontalboard is part of their standard equip-ment. This is regardless of the cameratechnology they use, may it be analogor digital.

But digital photography and its possi-bilities in particular make the benefitsof a shooting table obvious. No matterif you want to document your teddybear or model car collection,photograph expensive jewelry or pre-cious coins for insurence purposes orneed a quick picture for an internetauction - digital photography with itsconnection to computer and printermakes it easy and the shooting table

All dished up


99Shooting Tables

provides support and background forthe subject.

Some problems do not even come upbecause of features and properties ofthe features and properties of moderndigital cameras. A zoom lens withmacro setting is standard equipmentfor most of the digitals, the desiredframe can be controlled with help ofthe camera monitor and nobody hasto worry about parallax differences.

The concave shaped background isthe most important part of a shootingtable. It provides a transition from fore-ground to background without a visibleedge. There are additional possibilitiesif the concave-shaped background ismade of translucent material and isilluminated from the bottom and/orfrom behind. Light and lighting arealways important as some subjectsneed effective lighting to bring outtheir features.

For the vast spectrum of tabletop pho-tography Kaiser offers a variety of solu-tions to ”dish up”: Fixed and portableunits, for large or small, heavy or lightsubjects, variable system-based solu-tions with different components orcomplete units.

When your meal is dished up,everything should be nicely arranged.Why not do it the same way with yourproduct shots and still lifes?


Tabletop photography on a professio-nal level - that is what the TopTablePRO is designed for. In a floorspace of

only 34 x 34 in. (85 x 85 cm) it offersa complete photographic studiowith great versatility.

The secret of its success lies in itsmodularity: The shooting table forms abasic support that can be fitted with aconcave curved acrylic-glass plate ora strong wooden board for heavy

objects, and with a card-board background.

To isolate objects entirely from anybackground, the basic table can alsobe fitted with a crystal-clear acrylic-glass add-on table.

There are also side mounting bracketswhich can be used to attach lightingunits from the Kaiser camera standrange. The lights can also be positionedunderneath the acrylic-glass plate fortransmitted light shots.

The shooting table can be easilywheeled on its castors to any pointwithout having to dismantle lights andstands and set them up again.

10

TopTable PRO – The Compact Studio


11Shooting Tables

This is the regular set-up: BasicSupport 5921 and Acrylic-Glass Plate5924 are all you need for standardtabletop photography. In addition youmay use paper background of anywidth as shown in the picture at thebottom.

Existing lights (flash or continuouslight) can be positioned on separate

stands on both sides of the table. TheLighting Kit 5867 can be mounted

directly to the table.

If photographed objects shouldappear to float in mid-air against thebackground, the Add-On Table 5922is required.

Some objects are too heavy, theacrylic-glass plate would bend underextreme load. That is why theWooden Base Plate 5925 is available.The concave shaped background isformed by background paper of anydesired width. The BackgroundCarrier 5923 holds the backgroundpaper roll.

The Lighting-Kit 5868 is mountedunderneath the shooting table for

transmitted light shots.


12

5921Basic Support Strong square tube frame fitted with height-

adjustable feet at the front and lockablecastors at the back. Mounting facilities forreflected and transmitted lighting.

Height: 1.78 m (70 in.)Working height: 80 cm (31.5 in.)Required floor space: 85 x 85 cm (33.5 x33.5 in.)

5924Acrylic-Glass Plate A white transparent background acrylic-glass

plate that is mounted on the Basic Support5921 to form a concave shaped base.

Width: 80 cm (31.5 in.)Overall length: 168 cm (66.1 in.) Thickness: 3 mm

5922Add-On Table Can be mounted on the basic table (consi-

sting of the Basic Support 5921 and theAcrylic-Glass Plate 5924). The Add-On Tableis supplied with a concave curved crystal-clear acrylic plate.

Dimensions (WxHxD): 85 x 102 x 80 cm(33.5 x 40.2 x 31.5 in.)

5925Wooden Base Plate Can be mounted on the Basic Support 5921

(with or without Acrylic-Glass Plate 5924attached). The matt grey laminated woodenplate is used in conjunction with paper back-ground.

Dimensions: 85 x 56 cm (33.5 x 22 in.)

5926Mounting Adapter To attach Kaiser lighting units (see page 72)

for reflective lighting to the Basic Support5921. 2 pieces.


13Shooting Tables

5923 Background Carrier The carrier is mounted on the Basic Support

5921. Permits space-saving bearing of abackground roll. Especially suited in combi-nation with the Wooden Base Plate 5925.

Width: 85 cm (33.5 in.)

5867Reflected Light Illuminating Set Is mounted to the Basic Support 5921.

Consists of two softlights and holding rods.Lights can be slid, pivoted and adjusted inheight. Vertical holding rods have heightmarks and can be tilted to different angles.Fitted with two daylight fluorescents each,high-gloss inner finish and high-frequencyoperating system. Separate control box.

Lamps: 4 x 36 WColor temperature: 5400 KelvinCRI: 90-100 (1A)Reflector size: 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5868Transmitted Light Illuminating Set Is mounted to the Basic Support 5921.

Consists of two tiltable softlights, fitted withtwo daylight fluorescent lights each, high-gloss inner finish and high-frequency opera-ting system. Separate control box.

Lamps: 4 x 36 WColor temperature: 5400 KelvinCRI: 90-100 (1A)Reflector size: 50 x 21 cm

(19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5582Filter Holders Guiding rails for slide-in filters for attachment

to Reflected Lighting Unit 5867 andTransmitted Lighting Unit 5868. 2 pairs.

5583Diffusion Screens Fine structure acrylic glass. Can be mounted

in conjunction with Filter Holders 5582 toLighting Units 5867 and 5868. 2 pieces.

5594Polarizers Can be mounted in conjunction with Filter

Holders 5582 to Lighting Units 5867 and5868. 2 pieces.

5583

5594

5582

5567

5567


14

”topTable” is a classic among thecompact shooting tables. ”topTable” isnot only a modular system withvarious components, but also a com-pact unit with ”desk-top size” dimen-sions of 20 x 19“.

Whether used as a complete digitaldesktop studio or composed of dif-

ferent components to specificrequirements: ”topTable” copes

with all problems of smallobject photogra-phy. Standard

shooting situationswith reflected light,

silhouetting by back-ground lighting, floa-

ting images, shotsusing a glass plate or a

light tent – ”topTable”will always provide a

solution.

Product shots, catalog pho-tos, internet pictures, creative

stills, scientific photography,shots of medical preparations

and instruments: possible fieldsof applications are only limited by

the size of the subject.

The Studio on Your Desk


5928-29/5997-98Table-Top-Studio ”digital”

Complete desktop studio consisting of SmallProduct Table 5931 and lighting unit.Product table with white transparent concaveshaped acrylic background. Required deskspace approx. 50 x 50 cm (20 x 20 in.).Lighting unit consists of two small softlightsfor even and smooth illumination. Interiorreflector for high light output. Holding rodswith multiple orientation possibilities, screw-on clamps for attachment.

5929 and 5998 include an extra cameraclamp comprising a 55 cm (21.7 in.) swan-neck arm for cameras up to 600 g (21 oz.),ball head with 30 mm (1.2 in.) base and 1/4”camera thread plus universal desk clamp forboards up to 30 mm (1.2 in.) thick or tubesup to 55 mm (2.2 in.) diameter.

5928 Table-Top-Studio ”digital”

Includes RB 260 ”digital” Lighting Unit(5462), fitted with two compact fluorescents11 W, 600 Kelvin, color rendition level 1B, foruse with digital and video cameras. (Notavailable in 120 V)

5929 Table-Top-Studio ”digital plus”

Same as 5928, but with camera clamp.

5997 Table-Top-Studio ”digital S-HF”

With RB 218 High-Frequency DaylightLighting Unit (5454). Separate control box.Lamps: 2 compact fluorescent lamps, 18 Weach, 5400 Kelvin, CRI = 90-100.

5998 Table-Top-Studio ”digital S-HFplus”Same as 5997, but with camera clamp.

15Shooting Tables

5928

5929

5998 5997

5458

5997/98:

5460

5928/29:


5930TopTable-Set

Three-piece set made up with componentsof the “TopTable“ small product tablesystem. Consisting of basic table with trans-parent acrylic plate (5931), add-on table withclear acrylic plate (5932) and holding framefor accessories (5934).

5935Base Stand

For Small Product Table (5931). Permits theuse of different types of lighting set-ups orlarger light troughs underneath the smallproduct table.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 510 x 310 x480 mm (20.1 x 12.2 x 18.9 in.)

5931Small Product Table

Compact product table for table-top photo-graphy and reproduction. Table top/back-ground of transparent acrylic.


5932Add-On Table

Product table with clear acrylic plate to beset on the Product Table 5931 or to be usedseparately.


5933Glass Add-On Table

Flat product table for 5931 with glass top.Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 510 x 160 x405 mm (20.1 x 6.3 x 15.9 in.)

5934Holding Frame

For holding foils, clamp-on lamp holders orsimilar accessories with the included holdingclamps. Attaches to Product Table 5931 and5932. Dimensions (WxD): approx. 510 x 480 mm (20.1 x 18.9 in.)

16

5930

5935

5934

5931

5932

5933


5462”RB 260 digital” TopTable LightingUnit

Consists of two small softlights for even andsmooth illumination. Interior reflector for highlight output. Holding rods with multiple orientation possibilities, screw-on clamps forattachment, up to 48 mm (1.9 in.) clampingwidth. Lights can be switched separately.

Lamps fitted with 2 compact fluorescents 11 W, 6000 Kelvin, color rendition level 1B. (Not available in 120 V)

5877„RL 160 digital“ Add-On LightTiltable and rotatable reflector housing.Interior reflector for high light output. 55 cm(21.7”) swan-neck table clamp with 35 mm(1.4”) range.

Lamp fitted with 11 W compact fluorescenttube, 6000 Kelvin, color rendition level 1B.

Not available in 120 V.

5453-54„RB 218“ / „RB 218 HF“ TopTableLighting Unit

Daylight-type lighting unit with two softlightsfor even and smooth illumination. Interiorreflector for high light output. Holding rodswith multiple orientation possibilities. Can beattached at various points with clamps ranging up to 48 mm (1.9”). Separate controlbox.

Lamps fitted with two 18 W compactfluorescents, 5400 Kelvin, CRI 90-100.

RB 218 HF Lighting Unit (5454) with additionalhigh-frequency operating system.

17Shooting Tables

5460

5462/5877:

5458


18

5940 TopTable Lighting Unit Consisting of two 100 watt halogen lights

(5568) and a pair of holding rods (2 x 5936)for mounting the lights on the sides of theproduct table. The lights are focusable andindividually dimmable down to about 20 %,with swan-neck holders. Operated with twotransformers with integrated dimmers.Mains cord: 2 x 4 m (13 ft.). Halogen lamps: 2 x 12 V, 100 W, 3200 KelvinNot available in 120 V.

5936Holding Arm For fastening the Lamp Fittings 5564 or the

Flash/Light Holders 5574 to the ”topTable”Small Product Table. Also as an add-on tothe ”topTable” Lighting Unit 5940. 1 piece.(Mounting 5564 or 5574 requires twoHolding Arms 5936.)

5564GNT Lamp Fittings For use on the TopTable system. Is fastened

at any point on the TopTable frame or withHolding Arms 5936. Two lamp fittings forphotofloods with E 27 screw-in thread onswan-neck lamp rods.Lamp capacity: 2 x 250 Watt max. Cord: 2 x 2 m (6.5 ft.), with cord switch

5574GNT Flash/Light Holders For fastening conventional flashes or lights

with accessory foot at any point on theTopTable frame or in connection withHolding Arms 5936.

With swan-neck holders.

93324Conversion Filter Safety front attachment with barn doors and

safety glass for conversion from 3200 to5500 Kelvin. For 5940. 1 piece.

3054

3127/28


19Shooting Tables

5937”backlite 6000” Soft Light Source Light box as a backlight source for Table-

Top-Studio ”digital” (5928) and Table-Top-Studio ”digital plus” (5929) for use withTopTable Lighting Unit ”RB 260 digital”(5462) and Add-On Light ”RL 160 digital”(5877). Suitable for use with digital camerasand camcorders.

Illuminated area: 44 x 35 cm (17.3 x 13.8 in.)Lamps: 2 x 15 W, 6000 KReplacement lamp: 5938Dimensions (WxHxD): 504 x 91 x 431 mm

(19.8 x 3.6 x 17 in.)

2405/25”prolite basic 2” Soft Light Source Light Box as a daylight type backlight source

for ”topTable” product table system.

Illuminated area: 50 x 30 cm (19.7 x 11.8 in.)Lamps: 2 x 13 Watt, 5400 KDimensions (WxHxD):562 x 60 x 364 mm

(22.1 x 2.4 x 14.3 in.)

”prolite basic 2 HF” Soft Light Source (2425)with additional high-frequency operatingsystem.

5054Camera Clamp 55 cm (21.7 in.) long gooseneck arm for

cameras up to 600 g (21 oz.), ball head with30 mm (1.2 in.) base and 1/4” camerathread. Universal table clamp with clamprange up to 30 mm (1.2 in.) on boards or 55 mm (2.2 in.) on tubes.

5939Diffusing Foil For producing soft, shadow-free illumination.

Attaches to Holding Frame 5934 of”topTable” product table.

Dimensions: approx. 250 x 75 cm (8.2 x 2.5 ft.)

2136,2476

5938


20

Studio-out-of-the-Box

Digital photographers are the ones who, with growing enthusiasm, take pictures of small objects to includethem on their website, improve theirofferings with internet auctions or justarchive their collections. More andmore images are also included with e-mails.

Studio-out-of-the-Box was designed to be a multiple problem solver:Camera mounting, object positioningand background are handled ”out-of-the-box”, and as an accessory there isalso a lighting solution.

All will fit on your living room table - or

wherever you want to place your tem-porary studio. Studio-out-of-the-Box isprimarily a 30 x 45 cm/12 x 18” open-profile baseboard with a drawer andwith a smart trapeze stand snugglingoutside the baseboard. This makes itpossible to fold it resulting in a rathercompact unit that fits in the box.

The object is placed on thebaseboard, the drawer holds a framethat unfolds to carry the includedbackground roll. The background rollis only supported by the frame and

that makes it easy to use wider back-grounds. If the drawer is removedcompletely and turned upside down, itincreases the length of the studio baseby 30 cm/12”.

Opening the trapeze stand reveals itsfunction: a camera mounted on thepivotable and relocatable platform canbe positioned at any angle, any heightand various distances from the object.The trapeze stand can be easily adju-sted and holds the camera in anyposition. When shooting vertically froma top-down position the camera plat-form can be locked by two slidingguide bars in a way that the verticalposition will remain as the trapeze isrotated.

An optional lighting unit with two 25 cm/10” long tubes can easily beattached to the main table and willalso fit in the box.


5911Studio-out-of-the-Box

Compact foldable studio for digital photogra-phy. Comprises table, background support,background material and trapeze stand forcamera mounting.

On the trapeze stand the camera can bepositioned in many different positions and indifferent height and distance from the object.The camera platform is pivotable and reloca-table and can be locked for vertical shootingposition. Suitable for almost all digital com-pacts.

Table can be extended, background can bepositioned in different heights. Backgroundroll included, approx. 40 cm (4.3 ft.) wideand 130 cm (4.25 ft) long. To support widerbackgrounds a clip-on rail is included.

Dimensions (folded): 585 x 57 x 330 mm (23 x 2.2 x 13 in.)

Supplied with carrying box: 605 x 485 x 100 mm (23.8 x 19.1 x 3.9 in.)(without handle)

5912Studio-out-of-the-Box Lighting Set

The set contains two lights, adjustable inheight, pivotable and tiltable, mounted ontilting holding arms. There are two fasteningpoints on each side of the table to attach thelights.

Lamps: Fluorescent tubes in pivotablesockets, approx. 25 cm (9.8 in.) long, 8 W,2700 Kelvin, 8000 hours service life.

High frequency operation 30 - 40 kHz withintegrated electronic ballasts.


5913Replacement Lamp

For 5912. 8 W, 2700 Kelvin. Without holdingarms.


21Shooting Tables


5883”Open Tube 1” Shooting Table This shooting table is pre-tailored from one

single press board and is assembled by theuser. The background made of flexible pla-stic material is inserted into the assembledtable and fixed by velcro fittings. The evenlycurved background (”open tube” outline)improves the distribution of light on the subject.

Side frames of the table provide attachmentpoints for one or more lightung modules invertical or horizontal position.

Dimensions (WxHxD, incl. background).77 x 60 x 84.5 cm (30.3 x 23.6 x 33.3 in.)

5884Lighting Module For ”Open Tube 1” Shooting Table 5883.

One or more modules can be attached inhorizontal or vertical position. Adapter forvertical attachment is included.

Aluminum housing with interior reflector,equipped with 36 watt daylight fluorescentlamp, high-frequency ballast, on/off switchand diffusor screen.

Reflector size: approx. 44 x 7.5 cm (17.3 x 3 in.)

5880”Open Tube 2“ Shooting Table Miniature shooting table with a frame made

of folded corrugated card board.Background made of pre-cut card board.The evenly curved background (”open tube”outline) improves the distribution of light onthe subject.

This kind of ”single use” shooting table canbe disposed with waste paper after damageor multiple use.

Dimensions (WxHxD, incl. background):approx. 50 x 30.5 x 43 cm (19.7 x 12 x 16.9 in.)

22

132 cm51.9 in.

77 cm

30.3 in.

65 cm25.5 in.

50 cm

19.7 in.

5567


5875-76„ConCave“ Background Flat and flexible plastic plate with holes on

both sides and tightening cord. The plate canbe bent in the desired shape and then befixed by means of two ”beads” and choice ofrespective holes. Dimensions of flat plate: approx. 60 x 30 cm(23.6 x 11.8 in.)

5875: opaque plate for shooting with reflec-ted light.

5876: transparent plate, for shooting withreflected and backlight.

5877„ConCave“ Lighting Unit Tiltable light with small interior reflector, table

clamp and swan-neck holder. Equipped withcompact fluorescent lamp 11W, 6000 Kelvin,color rendition level 1B, for use with digitalcameras and camcorders.

Clamp range up to 35 mm (1.4 in.)Swan-neck: 55 cm (21.7 in.) long


6320Compressed Air Cleaner Easy-to-use and environment-friendly com-

pressed air cleaner with compressor, e.g. forservice workshops and labs, studios andwherever dust has to be eliminated quicklyand thoroughly. Quick-release connection forair hose. Adjustable pressure switch, displayon pressure gauge. Automatic operation:Turns on automatically when the storagetank pressure is below 4 bar and automati-cally shuts itself off when full (at 6 bar). Verylow noise level (30 dB/A at 1 m distance).Safety valve, water separator.

For technical specifications see page 194.

23Shooting Tables

5460


24

6317„Clear Gear“ Compressed Air For touch-free dust removal from optical, fine

mechanical and electronic equipment andcomponents. Compressed air in aluminum monobloc can.With spray valve and flexible capillary tube forinaccessible places. Environment-friendly,without CFC, harmless for ozone, 100% non-flammable. No dangerous gas-air mixturescan arise. Trouble-free in operation. Gaspressure is stable until can is empty. Willkeep indefinitely.

Contents: 200 ml, min.150 g (5.3 oz).

6381-82Matt Spray To remove undesirable reflections on shiny

surfaces such as enamel, glass, plastic,high-gloss paint, chrome, etc. The photomatt-spray produces an even matt finish,dries quickly, adheres well and can be easily removed with water. 400 ml can.

6381: Transparent

6382: Black

6388Adhesive Paste Permanently elastic putty for holding, sup-

porting and arranging photo objects. Theputty can be formed at will and sticks to theobject. It can be removed without leavingany residue.

Package with 250 g (8.8 oz.)

6678„Xerapol“ Acrylic Glass Polish Polish paste for removal of scratches from

acrylic glass, e.g. at shooting tables or lightboxes. Can also be used for acrylic glass oncars, motorcycles, trailers, furniture etc. Cannot be used on matt acrylic glass surfaces.

Tube with 50 g (1.8 oz.) polish paste

6318

9 x 6317

6679Acrylic Glass Cleaner Environment-friendly special cleaning spray

for acrylic glass. Supplied in pump spray bottle.

For more information see page 191.


02_Lighting Units 25.06.2004 12:55 Uhr Seite 25

26

Light is also indispensable for the ”pho-tographic” vision. If natural light is notsufficient or does not lead to the desiredresult, ”artificial” light sources comeinto operation.

But the nature of this light is no longer”artificial”. There are many light sour-ces that provide daylight or can beadapted to daylight using conversionfilters. Using specific type of film, butabove all the features and possibilitiesof digital cameras, also allow for anadaptation to ”natural light conditions”.

When shooting specific objects therequirements for lighting may be com-plete opposites.

Light can be soft and even sometimes,while it can be harsh and strong othertimes, should avoid shadows or createshadows, should highlight edges oravoid reflections, should be directed toplaces difficult to access, should even-tually be heat free or be ”subject-friendly” in other ways - the list ofrequirements could go on and on.

The lamps themselves - their size,shape and technology - as well as thelighting units they are used in, deter-mine one part of the illumination result,the other part is controlled by the posi-tion and the set-up of the lights, and istherefore based on the knowledge andskills of the ”lighting technician”.

Using flash makes high demands onthe experience of the photographer.With continuous light sources as pre-sented in this catalog the illuminationcan be evaluated precisely beforeshooting, because set-up and shootinguse the same light.

All-purpose Light


27Lighting Units for Photo & Video

Soft Lights normally provide for verysoft and even lighting. They are especi-ally useful with object photography withshadowless illumination. They areequipped with daylight-type fluorescentlamps and can also be supplied forhigh-frequency operation. That is whythey can be used with all kinds of digi-tal cameras without any limitations,also with scanning cameras, and thatis why they are often called ”digitallight”. They can also be used in videoapplications and in connection withhigh-speed cameras. Their light is coolso there is only a minor thermal loadon the object. All this, together with thelong service life of fluorescent lamps,allows for extended operating timesand long shooting sessions and there-fore high performance. Color renditionremains constant over a long period oftime and power consumption is ratherlow.

Halogen lights have high light outputand can cover wide spaces. Their lightis harsh and contrasty and you candeliberately intensify contrast and sha-dows. In addition their light is ”hot”.That is why in most cases lighting unitsare equipped with an extra cooling fan.

Halogen lighting units though are verycompact and light-weight, they areeasy to carry and are suitable for use”on location”.

Lamps with screw-in thread, commonlyknown as photofloods, have been aroundfor many years. They are used inreflector lights, the reflector itself canbe fixed or exchangeable. The charac-ter of illumination is determined by theshape and the surface of the reflector.All-purpose lamps found in homes, canbe used, but their performance isworse compared with special photo-floods. As generally known, the servicelife of incandescents is not very long.These lighting units are especially use-ful for portrait shots.

If you have to photograph very smallobjects, halogen spots are extremelyuseful. They can be targeted to theobject or just a part of it with the helpof flexible gooseneck arms.

Close-up photography and photo-micrography are the application fieldsof cold light sources using flexiblefiber-optic light guides to get light exactly to a specific area.


„proVision“ Soft Light

For even and soft illumination, especially sui-table for digital photography and video shoo-ting.

Fitted with 55 watt daylight fluorescents withvery low heat radiation. High-frequency ope-rating system (approx. 40 kHz) for immediateignition and flicker-free operation for unre-stricted use with all digital camera systemsincluding scanning cameras and scan-backs. High-gloss reflectors and intensifierbarn doors for exceptionally high lighting effi-ciency. Light output can be dimmed down to10% of maximum. Compact aluminum hou-sing. Light is tiltable, with mounting frame forsuitable stands/holding devices with 16 mmstandard spigot.

Color temperature: 5400 K (3200 K onrequest)Service life of lamps: approx. 8000 hCRI: 90-100

3431 proVision 6.55 HFLamps: 6 x 55 watt, 5400 K4 barn doors, cable remote control (3m/10 ft.)for dimming. Illuminating surface: 51 x 51 cm (20 x 20 in.)Weight: 8.6 kg (18.9 lb)

3428 proVision 4.55 HFLamps: 4 x 55 watt, 5400 K4 barn doors, cable remote control (3m/10 ft.)for dimming. Illuminating surface: 34 x 51 cm (13.4 x 20 in.)Weight: 6,7 kg (14.8 lb)

3425 proVision 2.55 HFLamps: 2 x 55 watt, 5400 K2 barn doors, dimmer on lighting unit.Illuminating surface: 17 x 51 cm (6.7 x 20 in.)Weight: 4.4 kg (9.7 lb)

3454/64 Fluorescent LampReplacement lamp for 3425/3428/3431. 1 piece.

3454: 55 W, light color 12, approx. 5400 K3464: 55 W, light color 32, approx. 3200 K

28


3433-35Diffusion Screen For use with ”proVision” soft lights.

Prismatic surface. 1 piece.

3433: for proVision 2.55 HF (3425) 3434: for proVisoin 4.55 HF (3428)3435: for proVision 6.55 HF (3431)

3436-38Soft Screen For use with ”provision” soft lights.

Frosted surface. 1 piece.

3436: for proVision 2.55 HF (3425) 3437: for proVisoin 4.55 HF (3428)3438: for proVision 6.55 HF (3431)

3439Diffusion Foil For use with ”provision” soft lights.

Can be cut to required size.

Dimensions: approx. 60 x 760 cm (2 x 25 ft.)



30

3061“studiolight 2000“2000 W Safety Lighting Unit

Halogen safety light for photo, filming andvideo shooting. With low-noise cooling forunlimited running and lengthened lamp life.Four-flap gate attachment with safety screenand two lockable receiving slots for conversi-on filter, color filter, diffuser screen and scat-ter screens. Clip-on holders for filter foils ontwo barn doors. No light escapes at sidedue to special labyrinth design of the safetyattachment frame. Thermostat for automaticcut-out when too hot. Temperature-resistant,tough reflector housing with carrying hand-les. Mouting bracket pivots by 210° for stan-ding or hanging. Light steplessly tilts andlocks in any position. 3/8“ stand thread.Halogen lamps can be switched on separa-tely and have separate fuses. Can be swit-ched to setting light (2 x 500 watt). Diffuserscreen and lamps in standard specification.Technical data:Halogen lamp: 2 x 1000 W, 3200 KCord: 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)Weight: approx. 2800 g (6 Ibs. 3 oz.)Dimensions approx. 190 x 215(WxHxD): x 200 mm

(7.5 x 8.5 x 7.9 in.)

3062 Conversion Filter Complete insert for studiolight 2000.

Heat-resistant safety glass. With handle.Dimensions: approx. 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

3035 Protective Screen Complete insert for studiolight 2000. Clear

glass screen made of heat-resistant safetyglass. With handle.Dimensions: 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

3032-34 Colour Filter Complete insert for studiolight 2000. For

producing special colour effects. With handle.Dimensions: approx. 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

3032: green3033: red3034: yellow

3045-46 Scatter Screen Complete insert for studiolight 2000.

With handle.Dimensions: approx. 152 x 205 mm (6 x 8.1 in.)

3045: fine, mesh .52 mm3046: coarse, mesh 1 mm

3035

3045-46

3062

3075

3094



93375“studiolight 1000“1000 W Safety Lighting Unit

Halogen safety light for photo, filming andvideo shooting. With low-noise cooling fanfor unlimited operation and longer lamplife.Attachment with pivoting four-flap gate andlockable receiving slot for safety screen, dif-fuser screen, colour filters and conversion fil-ter. Clip-on holders for filter foils on two barndoors. Louvred ventilation slots to stop lightescaping at sides. Variable focussing: theangle of light reflection can be varied step-lessly from 50° to 90°. Thermostat for auto-matic cut-out when too hot. Temperature-resistant, tough reflector housing with carry-ing handle. Mounting bracket pivots by 210°for standing or hanging. Light steplessly tiltsand locks in any position. 3/8“ stand thread.Can be switched to setting light (500 watt).Safety screen, diffuser screen and lamp instandard specification.Technical data:Halogen lamp: 1000 W, 3400 KCord: 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)Weight: approx. 2100 g (4 Ibs. 10 oz.)Dimensions: approx. 155 x 185 x(WxHxD) 230 mm

(6.1 x 7.3 x 9.1 in.)

93377 Conversion Filter Complete insert for studiolight 1000.

Heat-resistant safety glass. With handle.Dimensions: approx. 102 x 142 mm (4 x 5.6 in.)

3075/3094 Halogen Lamp 1000 W, socket GX 6,35.

3075: 3400 K,av. service life approx. 15 hours

3094: 3200 K,av. service life approx. 75 hours

3017 Protective Screen Complete insert for studiolight 1000.

Clear glass screen made of heat-resistantsafety glass. With handle. Dimensions: approx. 102 x 142 mm (4 x 5.6 in.)

93377

3017

3075

3094


93325„videolight 4“Safety Lighting Unit

Technical data:Halogen lamps: 2 x 1000 W, 3400 KFuses: 2 x F 6.3 ACord: 4 m (13ft. 1 in.)Weight: approx. 1500 g

(3 Ibs. 5 oz.)Dimensions (handle approx. 145 x 155folded down): x 190 mm(WxHxD): (5.7 x 6.1 x 7.5 in.)Height with handle: approx. 270 mm

(10.6 in.)

Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming andvideo shooting. Extremely quiet blower coo-ling for unlimited operation in every position.Four large light flaps for direct-aim lighting.Front attachment with diffusor screen ofheat-resistant safety glass for extra-softlighting.The upper part can be tilted steplessly forindirect lighting. The handle can be tiltedthrough 180° and when mounted on a tripodassumes the function of a tilting head. Foreconomical storing, the handle folds snuglyonto the housing. Two stand threads 1/4“.The lamps can be switched on separatelyand have their own fuses. Additional switchfor modelling light (2 x 500 W). Suppliedcomplete with camera bracket and lamps.


Technical data:Halogen lamp: 1000 W, 3400 KFuse: F 6.3 ACord: 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)Weight: approx. 1300 g

(2 Ibs. 14 oz.)Dimensions (with approx. 100 x 140handle folded down): x 190 mm

(3.9 x 5.5 x 7.5 in.)Height with handle: approx. 250 mm

(10 in.)

Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming andvideo shooting. Extremely quiet blower coo-ling for unlimited operation in every position.Thermostat for automatic shut-off if overhea-ting. Heat-resistant housing. Front attach-ment with safety-glass diffuser plate forextra-soft lighting. Four large barn doors fordirect-aim lighting.

The upper part can be tilted steplessly forindirect lighting. The handle can be tiltedthrough 180° and when mounted on a tripodassumes the function of a tilting head. Theunit can then be tilted upward and down-ward. For economical storing, the handlefolds snugly onto the housing. Two standthreads 1/4“. Supplied complete with lampand camera bracket.

32

3029 Conversion Filter Complete safety front attachment with light

flaps and conversion filter of safety glass forvideolight 4 (93325).Dimensions (W x H x D): approx. 145 x 135x 70 mm (5.7 x 5.3 x 2.8 in.)

3002 Conversion Filter Complete safety front attachment with light

flaps and conversions filter of safety glass forvideolight 6 (93304). Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 105 x 125 x 70 mm (4.1 x 4.9 x 2.8 in.).

3075

3094

3075

3094


93307-08„videolight 8“Safety Lighting Unit

Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming andvideo shooting. Unlimited continuous opera-tion without extra cooling. Front attachmentwith diffuser made of safety glass.Temperature-resistant reflector casing, forindirect lighting tilts upward by 90° with fiveclick-stops. Slot shoe for mounting oncamera. Thread 1/4“ for mounting on stand.On/off switch.

93307: with four barn doors93308: without barn doors

Technical data:Halogen lamp: 300 W, 3400 KFuse: F 2 ACord: 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)Weight: approx. 690 g (1 Ibs. 8 oz.)Dimensions approx. 87 x 164 (W x H x D): x 135 mm

(3.4 x 6.5 x 5.3 in.)


Halogen lighting unit for photo, filming andvideo shooting. Unlimited continuous opera-tion without extra cooling. Four barn doorsto direct the beam. Variable focusing: Theangle of light emersion can be adjusted con-tinuously from 40° to 90°. Two mountingpossibilities: either flat on the housing - thelight tilts by 25° - or raised on pivotingbracket. In this position the light can be tiltedupwards and downwards by a total of 100°.1/4” tripod thread. On/off switch.

Technical data:Halogen lamp: 150 W, 3400 K Fuse: F 2 ACord: approx. 4 m (13 ft. 1 in.)Weight: approx. 600 g (1 lb 5 oz)Dimensions approx. 66 x 145 (100) x 125(WxHxD): mm (2.6 x 5.7 (3.9) x 4.9 in.)


93318Conversion Filter Safety front attachment with barn-doors and

safety glass conversion filter for videolight 8(93307/08).Dimensions: approx. 87 x 87 x 75 mm(3.4 x 3.4 x 3 in.)

93391Conversion Filter Complete attachment with light flaps and

conversion filter for videolight 150 (93392)and camlight 250 (93320).

3058

3038

3003


93356 „Mini“ Portable Lighting Kit Consisting of 300 W video light “videolight 8

S“ (93307), clamp (1512), reflector/shoot-through lighting umbrella (1522) and clamp(1520) in sturdy carrying case.

Dimensions: approx. 385 x 265 x 100 mm(15.2 x 10.4 x 3.9 in.)

3047/3049Portable Lighting Kit Complete light-stand-umbrella combination

in carrying bag with handle and adjustableshoulder strap.

3047Comprises ”videolight 8S” 300 W safetylighting unit (93307), light stand (5031), jointwith umbrella mount (5041), mounting rod(1520) and white umbrella (1522).

3049Comprises ”videolight 6” 1000 W safetylighting unit (93304), light stand (5031), jointwith umbrella mount (5041) and white studioumbrella (3080).

93359 „studio“ Portable Lighting Kit Complete lighting kit in strong case for easy

access and safe carrying. Contains two“studiolight 1000“ lights (1000 W), two joints5041, two light stands 5031, one studioumbrella and one holding rod 3084.

Dimensions: approx. 505 x 355 x 160 mm (19.9 x 14 x 6.3 in.)

34

30473049

3058

3038

3058

3038

3075

3094

3075

3094

for 3047:

for 3049:


3072Portable Lighting System

Complete lighting system consisting of:

2 „studiolight 2000“ fan-cooled 2000 Wsafety lights (3061), each one with two individually switchable 1000 W lamps,3200 K, modelling light, four barn doors,diffusion screen and filter compartment,2 fine scatter screens (3045)2 coarse scatter screens (3046)2 light stands (5031),1 joint with reflector umbrella mount (5041),1 mounting rod (3084),1 reflector umbrella.

Packed in a strong aluminium case withadditional pockets for further accessories.

Dimensions of case: approx. 520 x 420 x 230 mm (20.5 x 16.5 x 9.1 in.)

3070Portable Lighting System

Complete lighting system consisting of:

3 „studiolight 2000“ fan-cooled 2000 Wsafety lights (3061), each one with two individually switchable 1000 W lamps,3200 K, modelling light, four barn doors,diffusion screen and filter compartment,3 conversion filters (3062),3 fine scatter screens (3045)3 coarse scatter screens (3046)3 light stands (5031),2 joints with reflector umbrella mount (5041),2 mounting rods (3084),2 reflector umbrellas (3042).

Packed in a strong aluminium case.

Dimensions of case: approx. 720 x 420 x 230 mm (28.3 x 16.5 x 9.1 in.)


3075

3094

3075

3094


3132Reflector Socket Light-metal socket housing, can be swivelled

steplessly, with holes and tightening screwsfor reflectors 3133-36. E 27 ceramic socket,steplessly adjustable for focussing. Mountingbracket with 3/8“ tripod bush.Can be used with photofloods up to 500 Wand E 27 socket all-purpose lamps.

Cord: 4 m (13 ft.)/120 V: 2 m (6 1/2 ft.),with cord switch.

3133/34/36Interchangeable Reflector With attaching pins for reflector socket 3132.

White lacquered inner surface for softlighting. Outer surface of non-reflecting dullblack enamel.

3133: depth approx. 200 mm (7.9 in.),ø approx. 345 mm (13.6 in.)



36

3136

3134

3133

3124-3130


3121Studio Light Reflector with white lacquered interior surface

for soft lighting. Outer surface of non-reflecting dull black enamenl. Catch jointwith tightening screw and 3/8“ tripod bush.For photofloods up to 500 W and all-pur-pose lamps E 27.

Reflector diameter: 260 mm (10.2 in.)Cord: 4 m (13 ft.)/

120 V: 2 m (6 1/2 ft.), with cord switch

Supplied without lamp

3124–30Photoflood With E 27 screw-in thread.

3124: Opal Lamp 150 W, 3000 K3125: Reflector Lamp 500 W, 3200 K 3126: 500 W, 3200 K, without reflector3127: Reflector Lamp 250 W, 3400 K 3128: Reflector Lamp 150 W, 3200 K 3129: Reflector Lamp 500 W, 5000 K

For use with daylight films3130: 250 W, 3000 K, without reflector


3125

3129

3126

3127-28

3124-3130


Lamp Survey

3454/64Dulux Fluorescent Lamps

Replacement lamps for soft lights 3425/3428 and 3431.

Power: 55 WCRI: 90-100 Average service life atsteady color temperature: 8000 hoursSocket: 2 G 11Length: 533 mm (21 in.)Tube diameter: 2 x 17,5 mm (0.69 in.)

Please replace fluorescent lamps as a whole set if requirements for color-correct lighting are high.

3454 Color temperature 5400 K, Light color 12, 1 piece3464 Color temperature 3200 K, Light color 32, 1 piece

Halogen Lamps

38

3027 6 V 20 W 3200 K G 4 100 hrs 93302 151

3008 6 V 35 W 3200 K G 4 50 hrs 93396, 93397 150

3028 12 V 50 W 3200 K G 6,35 50 hrs 93310 152

3054 12 V 100 W 3200 K G 6,35 25 hrs

3036 24 V 250 W 3200 K G 6,35 50 hrs 93320 151

3003 230 V1) 150 W 3400 K GX 6,35 20 hrs 93392 33

3038 230 V2) 300 W 3200 K GX 6,35 75 hrs 93307, 93308 33

3058 230 V1) 300 W 3400 K GX 6,35 15 hrs

3094 230 V2) 1000 W 3200 K GX 6,35 75 hrs 3061, 93304, 30-32

3075 230 V1) 1000 W 3400 K GX 6,35 15 hrs 93325, 93375

Cod

e no

.

Volta

ge

Pow

er

Col

or t

empe

ratu

re

Soc

ket

Av.

ser

vice

life

suita

ble

for

cata

log

page

1) also available in 120 V and 240 V2) also available in 120 V



The heavier and bigger the lightingunit, the more important the light stand.It should stand firm, even when set tomaximum height.

The stand should ”suit” the light, and acheap solution could soon become anexpensive one, if in case of a ”crash”the light or other things could be damaged.

Most of the lights have a mountingbracket or a tiltable grip in order toarrange for a specific position on thestand. Additional joints and holdingdevices provide easy attachment ofumbrellas. They are important whenlight should not hit the subject with itsfull power or harshness. Very often theamount of light should be reduced to acertain value. Studio and reflectorumbrellas are then of great help. Theumbrella is mounted at the properdistance in front of the lighting unit.Umbrellas with a black outside coatingprovide powerful, but diffuse reflectionfrom the inside surface (= indirectlighting). A white inner coating gives soft, neutral reflections, a

silver inside surface leads to moreaccentuated effects and a gold coa-ted reflector umbrella is the bestsolution for warm color renditionwhen shooting portraits or nudes.The transparent white umbrellaleads to similar results and can alsobe used for portraits. As the light isnot only reflected but also transmit-ted, it can also be used for directlighting.

In the end an umbrella provides for softer, shadowless andmore even illumination.

If there is no room forplacing stands, clamps andmounting accessories are valuablehelpers to attach lights on shelves,doors or to tables.

Stands, Umbrellas and Other Helpers


5031 „Compact“ Light Stand

Light-weight stand with five-section telescopecentre column. Particularly suited for use inportable equipment kits. Solid flat metal legs.Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8”mounting threads and with adapter sleeve forstandard 16 mm (5/8”) pivot pins. Made ofblack anodized light alloy.Setting height: approx. 52–220 cm

(20.5 - 86.6 in.) Length closed: approx. 48 cm (18.9 in.)Load: max. 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs)Weight: approx.1000 g (2.2 lbs.)

5033 „Standard“ Light Stand

Light-weight stand with four-section telescopecentre column. Solid flat metal legs.Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8”mounting threads and with adapter sleeve forstandard 16 mm (5/8”) pivot pins. Made ofblack anodized light alloy.Setting height: approx. 88-250 cm

(34.6- 98.4 in.)Length closed: approx. 86 cm (33.9 in.)Load: max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs.)Weight: approx. 1280 g (2.8 lbs)

5035 „Profi“ Light Stand

Heavy-weight stand with three-section teles-cope centre column. Reinforced tripod base.Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and 3/8”mounting threads and with adapter sleeve forstandard 16 mm (5/8”) pivot pins. Made ofblack anodized light alloy.Setting height: approx. 104–290 cm

(40.9 - 114.2 in.)Length closed: approx. 101 cm (39.8 in.)Load: max. 10 kg (22 lbs.)Gewicht: approx. 2050 g (4.5 lbs.)

5048Reversible Thread Pin

Pin with 1/4” and 3/8” mounting threads. For5031, 5033, 5035, 3402, 3403, 3404, 3421,3423, 5044, 5041, 5027, 5028, 5043, 5045.Pin is mounted to the light and is insertedinto the 16 mm sleeve of the stand or moun-ting accessory.

40

5048

5031 5033 5035

1” 1”

3 /8” 1/4”5 /8”


3402 „Small“ Light Stand

Four-part extending center column with aircushion, locked by big clamping ring. Centrecolumn and legs made of polished aluminiumtube. Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and3/8” mounting threads.Setting height: approx. 72–210 cm

(28.3 - 82.7 in.)Length closed: approx. 68 cm (26.8 in.)Load: max. 3 kg (6.6 lbs.)Weight: approx. 1400 g

(3.1 lbs.)

3403 „Medium“ Light Stand

Three-part extending center column with aircushion, locked by big clamping ring. Centrecolumn and legs made of polished aluminiumtube. Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and3/8” mounting threads.Setting height: approx. 99–244 cm

(39 - 96.1 in.) Length closed: approx. 91 cm (35.8 in.) Load: max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs.)Weight: approx. 1700 g

(3.7 lbs.)

3404 „Large“ Light Stand

Four-part extending center column with aircushion, locked by big clamping ring. Centrecolumn and legs made of polished aluminiumtube. Reversible thread pin with 1/4” and3/8” mounting threads.Setting height: approx. 101–325 cm

(39.8 - 128 in.)Length closed: approx. 96 cm (37.8 in.) Load: max. 10 kg (22 lbs.)Weight: approx. 1850 g

(4.1 lbs.)

5049Tripod Adapter

For mounting devices with 1/4” tripod bushon tripods with 3/8” connecting thread. With1/4” threaded pin and 3/8” threaded hole.Height: approx. 27 mm (1.1 in.)


5049

3402

3403 3404


3421Studio Light Stand

Mobile and extremely stable light stand.Folding tripod legs with fixable pivoting rol-lers. Centre column steplessly adjustablebetween 1.40 m and 2.30 m (4.6 and 7.5 ft.)Hole for standard 28 mm (1.1 in.) pivot pinand with reducer to 16 mm (.6 in.).Reversible thread insert with 3/8“ and 1/4“mounting thread.

Setting height: approx. 140 - 230 cm(55.1 - 90.6 in.)

Load: max. 50 kg on centre(110 lbs.)

Weight: approx. 6.8 kg (15 Ibs.)

3423Studio Stand

Mobile light stand for heavy-duty service(e.g. for proVision softlights), 28 mm (1.1 in.)vertical mounting hole, two horizontal mounting holes, 28 mm (1.1 in.) and 16 mm(0.6 in.). With adapter for 28 mm receptaclehole and 16 mm standard spigot with 3/8”thread. Crank operated height adjustment,with securing key and locking screw.

Setting height: approx. 138-218 cm(54.3 x 85.8 in.)

Load: max. 30 kg/15 kg (66 lbs./33 lbs.)(vertical/horizontal)

Weight: approx. 10.4 kg (22.9 lbs.)

42

3423

3421


3407Background Support System Complete system to support paper back-

ground rolls in widths of up to 275 cm (9 ft).Consists of two stands, extendable to 3.25 m(10.7 ft.), and a 3-section horizontal pole tohold the background roll. The stands canalso be used separately as light stands.

Complete kit in a carrying case.

5923Background Cardboard Holder Holds 110 to 270 cm (3.6 x 8.9 ft.) width

background cardboard on rolls.For mounting on tripods with 3/8“ thread.

Width: approx. 85 cm (33.5 in.)

5044Universal Clamp with Extension Arm

Universal clamping device for boards up to30 mm (1.2 in.), also suitable for attachmentto tubes of 13 to 55 mm (.5 to 2.2 in.) dia-meter. Detachable extension arm with inter-changeable 1/4“ and 3/8“ mounting threads.



44

5041Joint with Umbrella Mount Heavy-duty metal joint for attaching lighting

units to stands. Upper section can be tiltedand locked in any position. With hole (9.2mm diam.) for reflector umbrella. Reversible1/4“ and 3/8“ thread pin in upper section,reversible 1/4“ and 3/8“ thread sleeve inlower section.

Height: approx. 185 mm (7.3 in.)

1512Clamp For simple attachment of lightweight lighting

units. Removable accessory shoe on balljoint. Tiltable to all sides in infinite steps,lockable in any position. Additional connec-ting thread 1/4“. With reflector umbrella hol-der ø 9.2 mm. Clamp is impact-resistant pla-stic with non-slip rubber studs.

Clamp span: max. 40 mm (1.6 in.)Height: approx. 90 mm (3.5 in.)

3084/1520Umbrella Mounting Rod Allows attachment of the reflector umbrella

precisely in the line of the lighting unit.

3084: For use together with 5041. Length: approx. 380 mm (15 in.), hole for umbrella: approx. 9.2 mm (.35 in.)

1520: For attachment of reflector umbrella1522 in conjunction with clamp 1512.Length: approx. 200 mm (7.9 in.), holefor umbrella: approx. 8 mm (.31 in.)

1522Reflector Umbrella White, waterproof coated nylon fabric. For

use as a reflector and for shoot-throughlighting with small lamps . Rods chrome ornickel-plated.

Diameter: approx. 37 cm (14.6 in.)Height: approx. 30 cm (11.8 in.)Rod-ø: approx. 7.9 mm (.31 in.)


3080 Studio Umbrella

With white waterproof-coated nylon fabric.Suitable as reflector or for shoot-throughlighting. For use with lighting units and flashequipment. Chrome-plated rods, umbrellaspoke tips of white plastic.

Umbrella diameter: approx. 90 cm (35.4 in.)Height: approx. 58 cm (22.8 in.)Rod-ø: approx. 7.8 mm (.3 in.)

3081 Reflector Umbrella

For use with lighting units and flash equip-ment. Skin of PVC, chrome and nickel-pla-ted rods.

Umbrella-ø: approx. 80 cm (31.5 in.)Height: approx. 55 cm (21.7 in.)Rod-ø: approx. 7.8 mm (.3 in.)

3042–43Reflector Umbrella

For use with lamps and flash equipment. Forparticularly soft lighting, high reflection.Outside black PVC fabric. Rods chrome ornickel-plated.

Umbrella-ø: approx. 85 cm (33.5 in.)Height: approx. 58 cm (22.8 in.)Rod-ø: approx. 7.8 mm (.3 in.)

3042: inside silver coated for accentuated illumination

3043: inside gold coated for warmer colour reproduction


3080 3081

3042

3043


46

Especially when shooting smallerobjects, accurate and controlledlighting can be a problem. An irregularshape might require light that bendsaround a corner, for example whencovering openings or hollow spaces, ora spectacular production calls for anextremely precise set-up of severallight sources.

Photographic documentation of techni-cal subjects or image capturing of pie-ces of evidence require above all accu-rate rendition of details without anydisturbing effects like shadows.

Small, flexible lights can be of greathelp in these cases. They do not needstands because they can be clampedto a convenient spot and a bendablegooseneck arm provides for exact posi-tioning of the light. In the same wayyou may also attach reflectors, foilsand even small and light-weight came-ras.

And when you are definitely in a tightspot, then you can even get the lightaround the corner - with help of thelight guides of a fiber-optic lightingsystem.

Being in a Tight Spot


596020 W Halogen Light With flexible arm, length approx. 50 cm

(19.7 in.), 14 mm (0.55 in.) diam., standard16 mm (0.6 in.) pin. 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) powercable with integrated cable switch.

Includes halogen lamp 12 V, 20 W, 3100 K,60° angle of illumination.

5970Halogen Light For use with 20 W, 35 W and 50 W halogen

lamps. With flexible arm, length approx. 50cm (19.7 in.), 14 mm (0.55 in.) diam., stan-dard 16 mm (0.6 in.) pin. 2.5 m (8.2 ft.)power cable and dimmer with end-positionswitch-off. Supplied without lamp.

5027-28/5043Clamp To mount on tubes and boards.

Fits standard 16 mm (0.6 in.) pin.

5027: Small table clamp, clamping width: 35 mm (1.4 in.). Weight: approx. 160 g (5.6 oz.).

5028: Large table clamp, clamping width: 80 mm (3.1 in.). Weight: approx. 450 g (15.8 oz.).

5043: Universal clamp, to mount on tubes of13-55 mm (0.5-2.2 in.) diameter.Supplied with a wedge. Then can bemounted on approx. 30 mm (1.2 in.)thick boards. Weight: approx. 450 g(15.8 oz.).


5027

5028

5043

5966/81/87Halogen Lamp For 5960 and 5970 Halogen Lights.

12 V, 3100 K.

5981 20 W, 10° angle of illumination5987 20 W, 38° angle of illumination5966 20 W, 60° angle of illumination

5967-68/82-83/88-89Halogen Lamp For 5970 halogen light. 12 V, 3100 K.

5982 35 W, 10° angle of illumination 5988 35 W, 38° angle of illumination5967 35 W, 60° angle of illumination

5983 50 W, 10° angle of illumination 5989 50 W, 38° angle of illumination 5968 50 W, 60° angle of illumination


48

5040Magic Arm To mount and individually align cameras,

lights and accessories. Mounted withreversible thread adapter on tripods andclamps with a 16 mm (0.6 in.) sleeve.Mounting platform with sliding 1/4”. Camera screw, 3/8”. conversion thread andreflector umbrella mount. Reversible threadadapter with 1/4” and 3/8” internal threadand with ball-and-socket joints at both ends.Both ball-and-socket joints and the middlejoint are released and tightened by a centrallocking disk. Max. load (in horizontal position):4 kg (8.8 lbs.)

5026/5038-39 Flexible Arm Flexible holding arm with standard 16 mm

(0.6 in.) pin, 1/4“ mounting thread, black.5026: Approx. 50 cm (19.7 in.) long, 14 mm(0.55 in.) diam., cable can be conducted throughthe arm. With knurled counter-locking disk.Load (in horiz. position): approx. 200 g (7oz).5038: Approx. 55 cm (21.7 in.) long, 12 mm(0.5 in.) diam., load (in horizontal position):approx. 180 g (6.3 oz).5039: Approx. 55 cm (21.7 in.) long, 18 mm(0.7 in.) diam., load (in horizontal position):approx. 600 g (21.1 oz).

5045Base for Flexible Arm Base for 5026/38/39 Flexible Arms and

5040 Magic Arm. With 16 mm (0.6 in.) sleeve for standard pin. Variable leg distanceup to 48 cm (18.9 in.) max.

Weight: 2.2 kg (4.8 lbs.)

5029-30Clamp Adapter For attachment of parts with circular profile,

e.g. pen cameras, LED light sources, fiber-optic light guides etc. 1/4” connectingthread.

5029: for ø 7-18 mm (0.3 - 0.7 in.)5030: for ø 15-25 mm (0.6 - 1 in.)

5046Holding Clamp Double clamp, 20 mm (0.8 in.) max. open

width, to mount filter foils, reflectors, masksand other accessories.

5038

5039

5026


3102Clamp-on Lamp Holder Gooseneck lamp rod, pivotable and variable

adjustable. Shock-resistant plastic clampwith non-slip rubber cleats. For lamps up to 250 W, E 27.

Clamp span: 40 mm (1.6 in.) max.Lamp staff: approx. 350 mm

(13.8 in.) longCord: 2.9 m (9 1/2 ft.), with

cord switch

Supplied without lamp.

3120Clamp-on Lamp Holder Lamp rod pivotable, tiltable, and adjustable

in height. Plastic-coated non-slip metalclamp. For lamps up to 250 W, E 27

Clamp span: 60 mm (2.4 in.)Lamp rod: approx. 250 mm

(9.8 in.) longCord: 1.5 m (4.9 ft.),

with cord switch

Supplied without lamp.


3127,3128

3127,3128


5945„macrospot 1500“ Fiber-Optic Lighting SystemFor pinpointed uniform and powerful lightingfor macro and micro photography, for table-top photography and for lighting inaccessibleareas. Due to the very low heat developmentand high light yield, cold light is also widelyused in microscopy, medicine, fine enginee-ring etc. The two flexible, jointly detachable,glass-fibres optical light guides with swan’sneck sheathing can be moved into almostany position required. Angle of reflectionapprox. 67°. Two-stage switching for full andreduced lighting power, with constant colourtemperature of 3200 Kelvin maintained.Extremely low-noise fan cooling at the backof the light source, so subjects not exposedto heat. Only very slight heating of housingdue to special heat-dispersing design.Illuminated on/off switch.Technical data:Halogen cold lightmirror lamp:15 V, 150 W, 3200 KCord: approx. 2.50 m (8.2 ft.)Weight: approx. 4.8 kg (10 Ibs. 9 oz.)Dimensions: approx. 230 x 115 x 205 mm

(9.1 x 4.5 x 8.1 in.) (without handle)Length of optical light guide:

approx. 50 cm (19.7 in.)

5946 Iris Diaphragm For adjusting the angle of reflection fromapprox. 38° to 20° minimum and simulta-neous dimming by max. five stops. With slotfor filter inserts. Can be mounted on lightguide. One piece.

5947 Focus AttachmentFor Reducing the angle of reflection to 38°approx. With slot for filter inserts. Can bemounted on light guide. One piece.

5948–49/5955Filter Inserts Filter screen for insertion into iris diaphragmor focus attachment 5947. 5948: Conversion filter, 3 pieces5949: Colour filter set, 3 filter screens each

in red, blue, green, yellow 5955: Polarisation filter, 3 pieces

50

5952

5946 5947

5948

5949



5941Light Source Two-stage switching for full and reduced

lighting power, with constant colour tempe-rature of 3200 Kelvin maintained. Extremelylow-noise fan cooling at the back of the lightsource. Illuminated on/off switch.

5942–43Optical Light Guide For lighting system 5945 and light source

5941. 4 mm thick glass fibre cable with gooseneck sheath. The self-retaining opticallight guide can be placed in almost any posi-tion. Length per optical light guide: approx.50 cm (19.7 in.)

5942: 2-arm5943: 3-arm

5944Ring Light Attachment Split ring light for especially homogeneous

and shadow-free illumination of subject field.For fastening to camera lenses from 35 to60 mm (1.4 to 2.4 in.) diameter.

With flexible cord, approx. 75 cm (29.5 in.)

5951Light Guide with Adapter Two-arm gooseneck optical conductor with

fastening adapter for the Kaiser TopTableproduct table system and for the rod links onmost Kaiser copy lighting units (edge length16 mm (.6 in.)). Flexible swan’s neck cordwith plug-in connection for lighting system5945 and light source 5941, length approx.90 cm (35.4 in.).

5952Halogen Cold Light Mirror Lamp Replacement lamp for lighting system 5945

and light source 5941. 15 V, 150 W, 3200 K,average life approx. 50 hours.


52

Basically light does not care if it”works” for a photo or film camera, avideo or TV camera, a conventional ordigital camera.

On the other hand some cameras askfor special lighting or, at least, for lightwith specific properties.

If a lighting unit is particularly light andcompact and carries its own powersource, it then is perfect for camcor-ders, analog and digital alike. Theselighting units can be found in the”Video Light” section starting on page147.

Video Lighting


03_Stands+Light 25.06.2004 13:10 Uhr Seite 53

When you think about the positions acamera is used in relation to the sub-ject to be photographed, two possibili-ties come into mind:

First there is the well-known posturewith the camera - sometimes mountedto a tripod - in front of our eye aimingat the subject, either from the front, theside, from below or at an angle from

above. The three dimensions of thesubject are always preserved, the

type of picture only dependsfrom the chosen perspective.

Then there is the verticalview from above where

usually the third dimen-sion is lost.

But that is not important for this per-spective. In fact this arrangement is forcapturing subjects photographically,that are two-dimensional anyway orwhere surface, structure, pattern orarray etc. is the point. This extends tothe aerial photograph, that - taken froman absolute vertical position - will serveas a basis for the production of maps.

Back to earth, this camera position isoften used for ”reproductions”. In gene-ral a reproduction is understood as afaithful rendition of a copy in a differentscale. Even if the reproduction doesnot stay that ”faithful”, the copy has tobe captured first in its original form.Devices for reproduction or ”copying”are well known to all of us.Photocopiers and flatbed scanners aresuch devices. Actually everybody whoowns a camera has such a ”copyingmachine” provided that the lens willmake a sharp picture at the necessarydistance.

”If you want to do reproductions withan ordinary camera, the use of a ->stand or a copying device is indispensi-ble.” (Urs Tillmanns, PhotoEncyclopedia, Schaffhausen 1991).

And here we are, dealing with the sub-ject.

The View from the Top

54


5555Stands & Lightimg Units for Image Capturing

As ”faithful rendition” is not alwaysnecessary any more, we shouldperhaps not speak of reproductions,but of a special way of ”image captu-ring”, because this has no meaningwith respect to the rendition of the”captured” subject. And this fits today’sdigital photographic world much better.Much of the ”capturing work” is doneby the flatbed scanner, often limited toletter format sizes, but cameras willalso find many fields of applicationhere.

The indispensable stand for that pur-pose, the often equally essentiallighting equipment and many moreuseful helpers can be found on the fol-lowing pages. Only when copy stageand storage stage (film, chip or scanarea) are absolutely parallel, all anglesare exactly the same as the original isand the captured image is in accor-dance with the original’s geometry.

Therefore camera stands for imagecapturing applications must be stableand precise. They usually have a base-board to carry the original (sometimeswith an integrated lighting system fortransparent originals), a column and acamera arm. Various lighting units areavailable for reflective originals.

The height of the camera arm can becontinuously adjusted on the column. Inthis way the desired frame and reproduc-tion ratio can be set with high precisionand consistent parallelism.

Depending on the size and weight ofthe camera, the size and nature of theoriginal and other requirements thereare camera stands in different sizesand lighting units in various configura-tions. Please read the next pages toget acquainted with the respective product families.


56

Combined with a suitable camera,stand and lighting equipment representa complete problem solution for imagecapturing tasks. Kaiser has organizedthese camera stands and lighting unitsin different system families. We use theterm ”system” because all devices canbe adapted to various requirementsdue to their modular construction andadditional upgrade components.

Grouping the devices in families, linksunits and components that fit togetherand function together. Besides that, ithelps to find the best choices for thespecific requirements of the job.

Especially when choosing the light it isessential, that it is suitable and ade-quate. It is suitable when dimensionsand stability match with the type ofcamera stand. That is why you will findthe suitable lighting units always withinthe same system family.

Family Relationships

The rePRO system

For professional requirements in conventio-nal and digital image capturing

The Copylizer system

A universal capturing tool, especially for digi-tal applications.



The R1 system

High flexibility and extraordinary adaptabilityare the key features and enable even theaccomplishment of very special jobs.

The R2 system

A ”amateur system”, also suitable for certain professional requirements.

The reprokid

Everything becomes smaller, lighter, more compact.

Many factors have to be consideredwhen checking if the lighting equip-ment is adequate: size, nature andreflection properties of the photogra-phic subject as well as the type of”film” used in the camera. Especiallywith conventional chemical film thecolor temperature of the light should”fit” the film: approximately 5000 Kelvinfor daylight film, 3200 - 3400 Kelvin forartificial light film.

When using digital ”film”, that is in digi-tal photography, new requirements canbe important depending on the way,CCD elements are arranged (chip orline). Especially with line scanningcameras and cameras or backs usingmicroscanning or multishot mode,there is a demand for high stability ofthe light. High-frequency lightingsystems are the preferred solution.


58

In the tables on these pages you willfind all essential specifications ofstands and lighting units for image cap-turing. They provide a quick survey andan easy comparison of selected data.

Most notably they comprise someimportant information for practicalapplication: the maximum covered ori-ginal width in relation to specific focallengths of lenses as well as values ofilluminance and feasible exposure timesettings with the lighting units.

A Survey to Begin with

R2

repr

o-ki

dR

1re

PR

OC

op

yliz

er

STANDS

Designation Code no. Column height Illumin. area (LF) Original width1 (cm/in) for Suitable(cm/in) or baseboard focal length of lens2) lighting unit

(cm/in) 50 mm 100 mm

Copylizer 5232 100/40 LF 43x35/17x14 53/21 27/11 5276/5277/5280/5281exe.cutive 5212 100/40 LF 43x35/17x14 53/21 27/11 5276/5277/5280/5281

5211 100/40 LF 43x35/17x14 53/21 27/11 5270

Copylizer 5206 67/26 LF 20x18/8x7 35/14 17/7 5266ini.tial 5205 67/26 LF 20x188/7 35/14 17/7 5265

RSP rePRO 5612 mit 150/60 88/35 44/17 56565615 und 66/26 80x60/31x24,5616/5617 LF48x43/19x17

RSX 5512 120/47 60x50/24x20 66/26 33/13 RS 10 5513 100/40 60x50/24x20 53/21 27/11RS 1 5510 100/40 45x50/18x20 53/21 27/11RS 1 5511 100/40 45x50/18x20 53/21 27/11RS 1 microdrive 5507 100/40 45x50/18x20 53/21 27/11

RS 2 XA 5411 76/30 40x50/16x20 38/15 19/7 5454/5453/5462/5450RS 2 CP 5301 60/24 40x42/16x17 29/11 15/6 5454/5453/5462

reprokid 5360/5361 59/23 32x38/13x15 33/13 16/6 included with 5360

1) at maximum height2) focal length is related to 35 mm format (24 x 36 mm)3) in connection with 5560 holding rods

5589/5590/5588/5558/5557/5556/5591/5595/5552/5554/55633)/55643)/55683)


R1

reP

RO

Co

pyl

izer


repr

o-ki

dR

2

5512,5513,5510,5511,5507

LIGHTING UNITS

Designation Code no. Power Color temp. Illuminance Time/ Suitable Lamp(Watt) (Kelvin) (Lux)4) Aperture5) stand

RB 4.55 HF 5280, 5281 4 x 55 5400 7500 1/30 5232, 5212 3454RB 4.36 HF 5276, 5277 4 x 36 5400 4700 1/15 5232, 5212 5567RB 2.36 5270 2 x 36 5400 1500 1/8 5211 5567RB 2.18 HF 5266 2 x 18 5400 1160 1/4 5206 5458RB 2.18 5265 2 x 18 5400 1160 1/4 5205 5458

RB 5056 HF 5656 4 x 55 5400 7900 1/30 5612 with 5615and 5616/5617 3454

RB 5055 HF 5589/5590 4 x 55 5400 7900 1/30 3454RB 5004 HF 5558/5588 4 x 36 5400 4900 1/15 5567RB 5004 5557 4 x 36 5400 3100 1/15 5567RB 5000 DL 5556 2 x 36 5400 1600 1/8 5567RB 5003 UV 5591/5595 6 x 18 UV-A, wave length 366 nm 5569RB 300 5552 2 x 300 3200 9000 1/30 3038RB 104 5554 4 x 150 3000 9700 1/30 31246)

4 x 150 3200 3900 1/15 31286)

4 x 250 3000 20000 1/60 31306)

4 x 250 3400 13000 1/60 31276)

RB 33) 5563 2 x 150 3200 5000 1/15 31286)

2 x 250 3400 15000 1/60 31276)

GNT3) 5564 2 x 150 3200 5400 1/15 31286)

2 x 250 3400 15200 1/60 31276)

RL 100 Vario3) 5568 2 x 100 3200 8600 1/30 3054

RB 218 HF 5454 2 x 18 5400 1160 1/4 5301, 5411 5458RB 218 5453 2 x 18 5400 1160 1/4 5301, 5411 5458RB 260 digital 5462 2 x 11 6000 1650 1/8 5301, 5411 5460RB 2 5450 4 x 75 3000 1400 1/8 5411 43566)

4 x 150 3000 3000 1/15 5411 31246)

R 2 CP 5303 2 x 11 6000 1650 1/8 included 5460

reprokid 5360 2 x 150 3200 14000 1/60 included 31286)

2 x 250 3400 31000 1/125 included 31276)

3) in connection with 5560 holding rods4) measured with highest possible eveness of illumination in consideration of the adjustability on the lamp arms to the subject surface: tabloid format,

R2 system and reprokid: letter format5) approx. exposure time in seconds at f=86) not included. 3127, 3128 are reflector lamps, 3124, 3130, 4356 are lamps without reflector


60

When you need a maximum in stability,solidity and load capacity, the KaiserrePRO system is the right choice.

This system is not only at home inphoto and video studios, but also intechnology, forensics and science, edu-cation, research and media production.Because of its extremely high level of

stability the rePRO system is especi-ally suitable to capture large format

reflective or transparent originals withdigital cameras in line scanning, microscanning or multi shot mode.

The modular-designed stand includesa table with fixed working height and acolumn that is mounted to the rigidbase. The optional lighting units alsomount to the table. According to thejob, the table can be equipped with alarge base plate for reflective originalsor with a trans-illuminator for transpa-rent originals.

Height adjustment of camera level ismotorized and works individually alongthe entire column via remote control.The camera platform can travel up anddown at two speeds, regardless of thesupported load.

For precise positioning of the opticalaxis of the camera, the camera carriercan be shifted horizontally and, in addi-tion, can be tilted by +/- 90 degrees.

The column, made of a multi-sectionspecial extrusion, is mounted to a firmlyattached die-cast base and is extreme-ly sturdy and vibration-resistant.

For reflective originals a compatiblelighting unit is available.

This professional work station - equip-ped with a suitable camera system ofyour choice - offers optimum conditionsfor sophisticated image capturingtasks.

Professional in Every Respect


5612 ColumnMade of special aluminum tube, black ano-dized, with printed cm and inch scales.Height adjustment motorized, with twospeeds. Cable remote control. Constantadjustment speed, independent of load. Anyheight position is exactly held via self-limitingworm-gear. Automatic end switch by photosensors. Camera platform horizontally adju-stable by parallel guides with friction drive,hand cranks for right-hand/left-hand operati-on, two locking screws. Build-in spirit level.Camera mounting plate 13 x 13 cm (5.1 x5.1 in.), tiltable by +/- 90°.

Column height: 150 cm (60 in.)Maximum load: approx. 15 kg (33 lbs.)Mounting thread: 1/4” / 3/8” exchangeable

5615 Table FrameWith aluminum die-cast base for 5612column. Demountable steel tube construction.Stacking tray 80 x 50 cm (31 x 20 in.) Height-adjustable feet.Height without base: approx. 88 x 66 x 78 cm(34.6 x 26 x 30.7 in.), required floor space:88 x 104 cm (34.6 x 41 in.)

5617 Trans-IlluminatorTo be inserted in the 5615 table frame.Illuminated area 48 x 43 cm (18.9 x 16.9 in.),glass cover plate. Total working area 80 x 60cm 31.5 x 23.6 in.)Lamps: 4 x 55 W. Built-in fan cooling, nothermal load on originals.Luminance 6700 cd/m2, high-frequency ope-ration. Color temperature of lamps 5400 K, CRI = 90-100, Average service life approx.8000 hours.

5627 Close-up-AdapterBracket to reduce the minimum camera-to-baseboard distance. Mounts on the cameracarrier.

4421 rePRO-AdapterFor use of R1 system camera arms.


5627 4421

5612

5617

5615

2414,2487


5656 RB 5056 HF Lighting Unit

Two light banks with high-gloss inside reflec-tors. Light emitting area 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x8.3 in.) each. Each bank is equipped withtwo 55 watt daylight fluorescent lamps, colortemperature 5400 K, CRI = 90-100. All-elec-tronic high-frequency operating system(approx. 40 kHz) for immediate ignition andflicker-free operation, can be used with linescanner, micro scanning and multishot digitalcameras and backs. Lights can be tilted andshifted. Horizontal lamp arms can be adjustedcontinuously in height. Vertical lamp armswith height markings, tiltable with detents.Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases,clamp width 15 to 55 mm (0.6 - 2.1 in.).Separate control box. Lamps can be switched individually. Cord: 2.50 m (8 ft.)

5592 Filter HolderGuide rails for slide-in filters for attachmentto 5656. Two pairs.

5593 Diffusion ScreensFine-structured acrylic glass. Slides in 5592filter holders. 2 pieces.

5594 PolarizersAttaches to 5656 with help of 5592 filter holders. 2 pieces.

5616 Base BoardTo be inserted in the 5615 Table Frame.Dimensions (WXD): 80 x 60 cm (31.5 x 23.6in.). High-compressed wooden material, all-side plastic-laminated, with printed grid andcm and inch scales. Includes slide-in carrierfor control box of optional lighting unit.

5614 Wall MountFor 5612 column. Lower part with base, spi-rit level and compartment for power supply.Top section adjustable for vertical columnpositioning. Screws and dowels included. Distance wall - column: approx. 35 cm (13.8 in.)Distance wall - camera platform: approx. 51 - 73 cm (20.1 - 28.7 in.)

62

3454

5616

5656

5614



Everywhere in industry and administra-tion, in medicine, science and research,in the entire area of communicationand information technologies, wherephotos and other originals have to becopied, catalogued, archived, proces-sed or transformed, there is one thingyou need apart from the camerasystem of your own choice: a Kaisercopylizer. It provides reliable cameramounting and suitable lighting

• for photographic and electronic captu-ring of subjects of any kind, includingthree-dimensional subjects,

• for electronic documentation using digital or analogue camera systems,

• for capturing documents, logos, symbols, photos and drawings for further processing in DTP systems orfor further use in video conferencesor online networks,

• for reproducing and documenting X-ray films, large format slides, silhouet-ted subjects and transparent objects,

• for making presentation slides,

• as a video presenter in schools anduniversities, at training courses andmeetings, in advertising, industry,medical imaging and for use by mili-tary and public authorities,

• for integration into evaluation systemsfor quality testing and monitoring inindustry labs.

The stands can be used either with or without the respective side lighting units, as there are moun-ting provisions on all stands.

eVisionary: The Copylizer


5211/12/32 Copylizer eVision exe.cutive/eVision exe.cutive HF

Camera stand with integrated transmittedlight source. Illumina base with four 13 Wdaylight fluorescents 5400 K, illuminatedarea 43 x 35 cm (16.9 x 13.8 in.). Illuminance3300 cd/m2. Mounting fixtures for optionalside lighting unit. Height-adjustable feet.Base with spirit level. 70 mm (2.8 in) widehigh-stability, vibration-resistant columnmade of special aluminum tubing, mattblack anodized, with cm and inch scales.Hand-crank operated height adjustment ofcamera arm by friction drive on plastic bea-rings. Weight compensation by integratedcoil spring, RTP camera arm with horizontal-ly adjustable camera platform, camera bodypositioning device and interchangeable 1/4”and 3/8” threads.

Illumina base (WxD): 63 x 55 cm (24.8 x 21.7 in.)

Column height: 1 m (40 in.)Max. load: approx. 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)Mains cord: 2,5 m (6.5 ft.)

5211: Mains frequency operationNot available in 120 volt

5212: Illumina base with high-frequencyoperation system (approx. 40 kHz) forflicker-free operation, especially impor-tant for use with digital scanningcameras.

5232: Illumina base with high-frequencyoperation system, dimmable.

64

2136,2477

106

cm /

41.

7 in

.

13.5-21.8 cm5.3-8.6 in.

43 cm16.9 in.


5276/77/80/81RB 4.36 HF/RB 4.55 HF CopylizerLighting Unit

Lighting unit consisting of two light banksand lamp arms. Lamps can be tilted, shiftedand adjusted in height. Vertical arms withheight markings, tiltable with detents.Connects to and is operated via copylizerillumina base. Lights with high-gloss insidereflectors for high light output plus filter hol-der and diffusion screen. High-frequencyoperating system (approx. 40 kHz) for uni-versal use with digital applications.

5276: Lamps: 2 x 36 w each, daylight fluor-escent lamp 5400 K, CRI = 90-100,light emitting area approx. 50 x 21 cm(19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5277: same as 5276, but with dimmablelights

5280: Lamps: 2 x 55 w each, daylight fluor-escent lamp 5400 K, CRI = 90-100,light emitting area approx. 64 x 21 cm(25.2 x 8.3 in.)

5281: same as 5280, but with dimmablelights

5270RB 2.36 Copylizer Lighting Unit

Lighting unit consisting of two light banksand lamp arms. Lamps can be tilted andadjusted in height, with filter holders and dif-fusion screens. Vertical arms with heightmarkings, tiltable with detents. Connects toand is operated via copylizer illumina base.

Lamps: 1 x 36 w each, daylight fluorescentlamp 5400 K, CRI = 90-100, light emittingarea approx. 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5256Clamp Base

For attaching lighting units 5265/5266/5270/5276/5277/5280/ 5281 to regular boards upto 48 mm (1.9 in.) thickness.2 pieces.


5270

5567

for 5270, 5276-77: for 5280/81:

3454

5256


5241/42/62Illumina Base

Can be combined with components of theKaiser R1 system. Trans-illuminator with four13 w daylight fluorescent lamps 5400 K, illu-minated area approx. 43 x 35 cm (16.9 x13.8 in.), illuminance approx. 3300 cd/m2.Optional side lighting units can be attached,connected and operated. Height-adjustablefeet. Base with spirit level for 70 mm (2.8“)wide column.

Outside dimensions (WxD): approx. 63 x 55 cm (24.8 x 21.6 in.)

Mains cord: approx. 2,5 m (6.5 ft.)

5241: Mains frequency operation.Not available in 120 volts

5242: High-frequency operation (approx. 40 kHz) for universal use with all digital applications.

5262: same as 5242, lights dimmable.

Accessories for 5211/12/32Copylizers and 5241/42/62 IlluminaBases

5292 Pressure Plate. Made of high-qualitycrystal glass to press „wavy“ originals. Canbe fitted to the hinge of the illumina base andis easily lifted. With adjustable stop guides.

5294 Metal Plate. For holding originals withmagnetic holders (four included) and as aprotective cover of the acrylic glass plate.Can be fitted to the hinge of the illuminabase and is easily lifted. With printed grid forpositioning and adjustable stop guides.

5296 Masking Frame. With adjustablemasks to prevent influence of stray lightwhen capturing smaller transparent originalsbetween 24 x 36 mm (35 mm slide) and 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7“). Can be fitted to thehinge of the illumina base and is easily lifted.

66

2136,2477

5296

52925294


5205-06Copylizer eVision ini.tial/eVision ini.tial HF

Camera stand with integrated trans-illuminator.Illumina base with four 8 W daylight fluores-cents 5400 K, illuminated area 20 x 18 cm(7.9 x 7.1 in.). Illuminance 4600 cd/m2.Mounting fixtures for optional side lightingunit. Height-adjustable feet. 70 mm (2.8 in)wide high-stability, vibration-resistant columnmade of special aluminum tubing, mattblack anodized, with cm and inch scales.Hand-crank operated height adjustment ofcamera arm by rack-and-pinion drive andadditional fine drive. Weight compensationby integrated coil spring, RA 101 cameraarm with camera body positioning deviceand interchangeable 1/4” and 3/8” threads.Illumina base (WxD): 32 x 45 cm

(12.6 x 17.7 in.)Column height: 67 cm (26 in.)Max. load: approx. 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)Mains cord: 2,5 m (6.5 ft.)5211: Mains frequency operation.

Not available in 120 volt5212: Illumina base with high-frequency

operation system (approx. 40 kHz) forflicker-free operation, especially importantfor use with digital scanning cameras.

5265-66RB 2.18 / RB 2.18 HF CopylizerLighting Unit

Lighting unit consisting of two lights and hol-ding arms. Lamps can be tilted and adjustedin height, vertical arms tiltable with detents.

Lamps: 1 x 18 w each, daylight fluorescentlamp 5400 K. Separate control box.

5265: Mains frequency operation5266: High-frequency operation

(approx. 40 kHz)

5298Metal Plate For 5205 and 5206 Copylizer. For holding

originals with magnetic holders (four inclu-ded) and as a protective cover of the acrylicglass plate. Can be fitted to the hinge of theillumina base and is easily lifted.

67Stative + Beleuchtungen für die Bilderfassung

2146,2475

5458

c

73 c

m /

28.

7 in

.

11.7 cm4.6 in.

33.5 cm13.2 in.


68

The Power of PossibilitiesThe R1 system is a powerfulsystem. It is universal, sophistica-ted, flexible, versatile, multi-functio-nal and adaptable.

It is designed for professional usersand dedicated photographers andoffers high stability, angular preci-sion and quality workmanship.

It is ideal for use with conventionaland digital camera systems up to 4 kg (8.8 lbs.) total weight andoffers a vast range of componentsand accessories.

Base boards of various sizes,columns of different height, camera

arms with a variety of adjust-ment options, lighting unitswith various lamps and reflec-tors, working at different powerlevels, with various mounting

and adjustment optionsmake it possible to adaptthe units to individualrequirements.

This system is completely modula-rized and therefore allows alsocustomized configurations.


5512 RSX Camera Stand

Big non-reflecting matt grey baseplate withprinted grid, cm and inch scale. Feet adju-stable in height. Spirit level in column base.Especially wide and low-vibration columnmade of matt black anodized aluminiumtubing with cm and inch scale. Heightadjustment with hand crank and rack withextra weight compensation by integrated coilspring. Blocking screw to stop accidentalchanging of height. RTX camera arm withadjustable and pivotable camera holder.Camera can be mounted forwards or back-wards. Camera platform can be horizontallyadjusted by fine mechanism.Interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8” mounting thread.Including dust hood.

Baseplate: approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm(23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

Height of column: 1.20 m (4 ft.)Loading capacity: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs.) max.


125.

5 cm

/ 4

9.4

in.

18-31 cm7.1-12.2 in.

43 cm16.9 in.


5513RS 10 Camera Stand

Large non-reflecting, matt grey baseboardwith a printed fine grid and cm/inch scale.Height-adjustable feet. Spirit level integratedinto the base. Especially wide, virtually vibra-tion-free column made of matt black anodi-sed aluminium section tube with cm/inchscale. Hand-cranked, rack-and-pinion heightadjustment, additionally counter-balanced bya built-in scroll spring. Locking screw pre-vents inadvertent changing of the adjustedheight. RTP camera arm (5524) with precisi-on, parallel-guided horizontal adjustmentover approx. 8 cm (3.1 in.). Reversiblemounting thread 1/4”/ 3/8”. Including dustcover.

Baseboard (WxHxD): approx. 600 x 32 x500 mm (23.6 x 1.3 x 19.7 in.)Column height: approx. 1 m (39 in.)Maximum load: 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)

70

5508Base Stand

For converting RS1 system camera standsfrom table to free-standing model. Also sui-table for all Kaiser baseboards from 45 x 50cm to 60 x 80 cm (17.7 x 19.7 in. to 23.6 x31.5 in.). Height-adjustable feet. Slide-incompartment for control box of optionallighting unit. Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.580 x 510 x 595 mm (22.8 x 20.1 x 23.4 in.)

105.

5 cm

/ 4

1.5

in.

15.5-23.8 cm6.1-9.4 in.

43 cm16.9 in.


5510–11 RS 1 Camera Stand

Non-reflecting matt gray base board withprinted fine grid. Feet adjustable in height.Spirit level in column base. Extra-wide andextremely vibration-resistant column of dullblack anodized aluminium tubing with cmand inch scales. Hand crank-operatedheight adjustment by friction drive on plasticbearings. Weight compensation by roll-offspring mechanism.

Base board: approx. 450 x 500 x 28 mm(17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)Column height: approx. 1000 mm (39.4 in.)

5511 RS 1 Camera Stand With RT 1 copy and titling arm with twocamera fastening points. Interchangeablethreaded bush 1/4”/ 3/8”. Camera carrierpivots and slides horizontally.Maximum load: 3 kg (6.6 lbs.)

5510 RS1 Camera StandWith RA 1 camera arm with interchangeablethreaded bush 1/4”/ 3/8” and camera adjust-ment device.Maximum load: 4 kg (8.8 lbs.)


5507RS 1 „microdrive“ Camera Stand

Same as RS1 Camera Stand (5510), butwith hand-cranked, rack-and-pinion heightadjustment, additionally counter-balanced bya built-in scroll spring. Additional fine drivewith 1:10 step-down transmission for super-fine adjustment. Locking screw preventsinadvertent changing of the adjusted height.

5511

5510

105

cm /

41.

3 in

.

18.5 cm7.3 in.

43 cm16.9 in.

23-31.8 cm /9.1-12.5 in.

105

cm /

41.

3 in

.

43 cm /16.9 in.

55105511


5589-90RB 5055 HF Lighting Unit

Cold-light unit with two light banks, eachone fitted with two daylight fluorescentlamps, high-gloss inside reflectors and high-frequency operating system. Lights can betilted and shifted. Horizontal lamp arms canbe adjusted continuously in height. Verticallamp arms with height markings, tiltable withdetents. Mounted with strong die-cast clampbases, clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.)Separate control box.

Lamps: 4 x 55 wattColor temperature: 5400 KColor rendition index: CRI = 90-100 (1A)Light emitting area: 64 x 21 cm

(25.2 x 8.3 in.)

5589: continuously dimmable down to 10%5590: not dimmable

5591/95RB 5003 UV / RB 5003 UV-HF Lighting Unit

UV lighting unit with two light banks, eachone fitted with three UV-A fluorescent lampsfor applications in UV and fluorescence pho-tography. Lights can be tilted and shifted.Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted conti-nuously in height. Vertical lamp arms withheight markings, tiltable with detents.Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases,clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.) Separatecontrol box.Lamps: 6 x 18 watt UV-AWave length: 366 nmLight emitting area: 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.)

5591: Mains frequency operation5595: High-frequency operation

(approx. 40 kHz)

5569UV-A Fluorescent Lamp

18 watt, average service life 8000 hours, G 13 socket, length 590 mm. 1 piece.

72

3454


5557-58/5588RB 5004/RB 5004 HF Lighting Unit

Cold-light unit with two light banks, eachone fitted with two daylight fluorescentlamps. Lights can be tilted and shifted.Horizontal lamp arms can be adjusted conti-nuously in height. Vertical lamp arms withheight markings, tiltable with detents.Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases,clamp width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.).Separate control box.


(19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5557: Mains frequency operation

5558: High-gloss inside reflectors and high-frequency operating system (40 kHz)

5588: High-gloss inside reflectors and high-frequency operating system (40 kHz),continuously dimmable down to 10%.

5556RB 5000 DL Lighting Unit

Cold-light unit with two light banks, eachone fitted with one daylight fluorescent lamp.Lights can be tilted. Horizontal lamp armscan be adjusted continuously in height.Vertical lamp arms with height markings, til-table with detents. Mounted with strong die-cast clamp bases, clamp width up to 48 mm(1.9 in.).


(19.7 x 8.3 in.)


5567

5567

5557

5558/5588


74

Fluorescent LampsReplacement lamps for rePRO, Copylizerand R1 system. Daylight fluorescent tubes.Color temperature 5400 K, light color 12,color rendition index CRI=90-100. Average service life: approx. 8000 hours with constant color temperature. For criticalrequirements on color-correct reproductionreplace fluorescents replace in sets.

5582/92 Filter Holders Guiding rails to attach slide-in filters to Kaiser

camera stand lighting units. 2 pairs.

5582: For reflector size 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.) (5556-58/5588)


5594 Polarizers Mounts to lighting units 5556-58, 5588-91,

5595 in connection with 5582/92 FilterHolders. 2 pieces.

Dimensions: 64 x 21 cm (25.2 x 8.3 in.), canbe trimmed to 50 x 21 cm (19.7 x 8.3 in.)

5583/93 Diffusion Screens Fine-structured acrylic glass. Mounts to

camera stand lighting units in connectionwith 5582/92 Filter Holders. 2 pieces.



8 W

5592

5593

5594

Code Power Socket Length Tube-ø Qty. fits(w/o pins) (mm) (pieces)mm/in

Tube 2146 8 W G 5 288 mm 16 1 5205-06shape 2475 8 W G 5 288 mm 16 4 5205-06

2136 13 W G 5 517 mm 16 1 5211/12/32/41/42/622477 13 W G 5 517 mm 16 4 5211/12/32/41/42/62

Dulux 5458 18 W 2 G 11 217 mm 2 x 17,5 1 5265-665567 36 W 2 G 11 411 mm 2 x 17,5 1 5270, 5276-77,

5556-58, 55882414 55 W 2 G 11 533 mm 2 x 17,5 1 56172487 55 W 2 G 11 533 mm 2 x 17,5 4 56173454 55 W 2 G 11 533 mm 2 x 17,5 1 5280-81, 5589-90, 5656

13 W 18 W 36 W 55 W


5552RB 300 Lighting Unit With two convestion-cooled halogen lights.

Lights can be tilted and shifted. Horizontallamp arms can be adjusted continuously inheight. Vertical lamp arms with height mar-kings, tiltable with detents. Mounted withstrong die-cast clamp bases, clamp widthup to 48 mm (1.9 in.). Lights can be switched separately. Lamps included.

Lamps: 2 x 300 WattColor temperature: 3200 KelvinCord: 2 x 4 m (2 x 13.1 in.)

5554RB 104 Lighting Unit With four reflector lights with E 27 screw-in

socket, suitable for photofloods up to 250watt. Lights can be switched separately.Lights can be tilted and shifted. Horizontallamp arms can be adjusted continuously inheight. Vertical lamp arms with height mar-kings, tiltable with detents. Mounted withstrong die-cast clamp bases, clamp widthup to 48 mm (1.9 in.) Reflector-diameter:approx. 14 cm (5.5 in.). Cord: 2 x 2 m (2 x 6.5 in.).Supplied without lamps.

Recommended lamps:

3124: Opal lamp 150 W, 3000 K3130: Photoflood 250 W, 3000 K

(without reflector)3128: Reflector lamp: 150 W, 3200 K3127: Reflector lamp: 250 W, 3400 K


3038/3058Halogen Lamp For RB 300 Lighting Unit. 300 W.

3038: 3200 K, 7300 lm, average service lifeapprox. 75 hours, 1 piece.

3058: 3400 K, 8500 lm, average service lifeapprox. 15 hours. 1 piece.


76

5560 Lamp Arms Complete set for two or four lights. The arms

are adjustable in height and angle and canbe fitted with 5563 and 5564 Light Fixtures,with RL 100 Vario Lights (5568) and withFlash/Light Fixtures 5571 and 5574. Clampattachment on boards up to 48 mm (1.9 in.).

5563 RB 3 Lamp Fixtures For use with 5560 Lamp Arms.

Lamps: 2 x 250 W max., E 27 Cord: 2 x 2 m (6.5 ft.) with cord switch

2 pieces, without lamps.

5571Flash/Light Fixtures For fastening conventional flashes or lights

with accessory foot or 1/4” mounting threadto holding rods with 16 mm (.63 in.) squaretube, e.g. the 5560 Lamp Arms.

3127/28



5568RL 100 Vario Lights For use with the 5560 Lamp Arms and all

other Kaiser camera stand lighting units withholding rods with and edge length of 16 mm(.63 in.).

Two focussable 100 watt halogen lights,separately dimmable down to approx. 20watt, with gooseneck holders. Operated withtwo transformers with integrated dimmer.

Specifications:Halogen lamps: 2 x 12 V, 100 W, 3200 KCords: 2 x 4 m (13 ft.)


93324Conversion Filter Safety front attachment with conversion filter

and barn doors. For RL 100 Vario Lights.Converts 3200 K to 5400 K.

5564GNT Lamp Fittings For use with the 5560 Lamp Arms and with

other Kaiser camera stand lighting equip-ment with holding rods with and edge lengthof 16 mm (.63 in.). Two lamp fittings forphoto lamps with E 27 screw-in thread ongooseneck lamp rods. Without lamps.

Lamps: 2 x 250 Watt max. Cords: 2 x 2 m (6.5 ft.) with cord switch

5574GNT Flash/Light Fixtures For fastening conventional flash units or

lights with accessory foot to the 5560 LampArms or to other holding rods with 16 mm(.63 in.) edge length. With gooseneck holders.

3127/28

3054


78

Choice and RealizationWithin the realm of possibilities inhe-rent in the R1 system, choice and rea-lization must not be too far apart.

The high degree of modularization, thevast range of components and theuncomplicated design of the „interfa-ces“ provide for so many variationsand versions, that there is hardly arequirement that can not be met.

Larger base boards, metal magnetizedsurfaces, longer or shorter columns,camera armes with various positioningand adjustment possibilities - all thiscombined with the many options inlighting equipment will lead to a bigchoice in practical solutions, which caneven be adopted later on to modifiedrequirements.


5517–19Base Board

Matt grey laminated base board with moun-ted base for attaching column. Printed finegrid with cm and inch scale. Spirit level inbase. Individually height-adjustable feet.

Dimensions (WxDxH):5517: approx. 450 x 500 x 28 mm

(17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)5518: approx. 600 x 500 x 32 mm

(23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)5519: approx. 800 x 600 x 32 mm

(31.5 x 23.6 x 1.3 in.)(Dimensions excluding base and feet)

5541–42Metal Baseplate

Metal base plate for base boards of camerastands and enlargers. Surface with 18 %reflecting matt grey finsih for easy determina-tion of exposure for copy work. Marked withgrid lines with 1 cm (.4 in.) line intervals andcm and inch scales. Material thickness: 1.25 mm. Non-slipunderside. Including four round magnetic ori-ginal holders with 32 mm (1.3 in.) diameterfor fastening originals or photo paper duringenlarging.

5541: Size of marked grid area: 40 x 35 cm(15.7 x 13.8 in.) Dimensions (WxHxD):approx. 454 x 15 x 430 mm (17.9 x .6x 16.9 in.). Fits on all 45 x 50 cm(17.7 x 19.7) base boards.

5542: Size of marked grid area: 55 x 35 cm(21.7 x 13.8 in.) Dimensions (WxHxD):approx. 604 x 15 x 430 mm (23.8 x .6x 16.9 in.). Fits on all 60 x 50 cm(23.6 x 19.7 in.) base boards.


55195518

5517


4473-76/4408-09Column Wide and extremely vibration-resistant

column of aluminium tubing with dull blackanodized surface and cm and inch scales.With mount and fastening mechanism forcamera arms. Height adjustment by handcrank.

Cross-sectional dimensions of the column:70 x 35 mm (2.8 x 1.4 in.)

4473: Height adjusted by friction gear withplastic bearings, without weight compensation, height 1 m (40 in.)

4474: Height adjusted by friction gear withplastic bearings, weight compensatedby built-in roller spring, height 1 m (40 in.)

4475: Height adjusted by gear rack withweight compensation by built-in rollerspring, additional 1:10 fine drive.Locking screw for fixing height adjust-ment. Height 1 m (40 in.)

4476: same as 4475, but without fine drive.

4408: Height adjusted by gear rack, weight compensated by built-in rollerspring, locking screw for fixing heightadjustment. Height 1.2 m (47 in.)

4409: Height adjusted by friction gear withplastic bearings, weight compensatedby built-in roller spring, locking screwfor fixing height adjustment. Height:1.5 m (60 in.)

4412Wall Mount Sturdy wall mount for all R1 system

columns. Wall mounting with 6 screws.Upper part adjustable for absolutely verticalposition. Lower part with base and spiritlevel. Entire height with 1 m column: 1.16 m(3 ft. 10 in.).

Distance wall - front edge of mount (withoutcamera arm): approx. 25 cm (9.8 in.)

Supplied with screws and dowels.

80

4409 4408 4476 4475 4474/73



5528 Object Carrier To take small objects or flat originals lit from

back and/or top. Consisting of 368 x 475 mm(14.5 x 18.7 in.) glass sheet in pivotingframe. Complete object carrier pivotable andadjustable in height. Glass sheet replaceablewith translucent acrylic glass (included).Suitable for all 70 mm (2.8 in.) wide columnswith separate mount (included).

External dimensions of frame (WxHxD):approx. 555 x 30 x 425 mm (21.9 x 1.2 x16.7 in.)

4455 Extension Arm To extend the camera arm mount. Required

for capturing large originals. This increasesthe distance between the optical axis of thecamera lens and the column base by 80 mm(3.2 in.), if the extension arm is attached bet-ween the mount and the camera arm.


82

5522RTX Camera Arm Camera mount with spirit level for fine

adjustment. Turns ± 180° and can be fixedin every position. Camera can be mountedon front or rear. Camera mount horizontallyadjustable with fine adjustment.

Interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8”. mounting thread.

5521RT 1 Copy And Titling Arm Camera fastening points for horizontal and

upright formats, with interchangeable threa-ded bush 1/4”/ 3/8”. and rubber rests.

A parallel guide makes the camera platformlongitudinally adjustable, and it can belocked in any position. The entire copy andtitling arm is tiltable to allow for reproductionof vertical subjects.

5524RTP Camera Arm Horizontally adjustable via parallel guides to

change the distance to the column. Movesapprox. 8 cm (3.1 in.) back and forth.Camera positioning device, adjustable to different camera bodies.

Reversible mounting thread 1/4”/ 3/8”.

5520RA 1 Camera Arm Device for adjusting the camera, can be set

to different camera bodies.

Interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8” mounting thread.

45-175

95-225 mm190 mm

132-220

147-235 mm

110 mm

71-155 mm

88 mm

70 m

m

100 mm90 mm

90 m

m



5523RA 101 Camera Arm Specially suitable for cameras with large

distance between tripod hole and opticalaxis of lens. Device for adjusting the camera,settable to different camera bodies.

Interchangeable 1/4”/ 3/8” mounting thread.

5539 RLR Camera Arm Camera platform can be shifted horizontally

to left or right and and can be blocked inany position. Adjustable stops for end posi-tion of camera. Camera can be mounted forhorizontal or vertical format. Especially suita-ble for use with 5904 Book Holder whencopying books page by page.

Camera platform moves approx. 15 cm (6 in.) from center to each side.

55402CC Camera Arm Similar to 5539, but with two camera car-

riers which can be adjusted separately. Formounting two cameras, e.g. for comparisonshots.

5531Focusing Stage Extremely flat focusing stage with fine drive

with spindle. Rapid adjustment with singlelever lock. Locking screw. Setting range 120mm (4.7 in.) with mm scale. Large cameraplatform with non-slip surface and inter-changeable 1/4”/ 3/8” mounting thread. 1/4”/ 3/8” tripod thread. Made of black anodized aluminum.

Two focusing stages can be combined forcrossed stanges.

45 mm90

145

mm

400 mm

51 m

m73 mm

114mm

400 mm

51 m

m

73 mm

114mm

232 mm

105mm

21 m

m


84

With digital photography camerasbecome smaller and lighter. Even if theloads are less - the requirements onstability have not changed.

Camera stands and lighting units of theR2 family are „light“ versions of the R1system. Designed for light-weightcameras, their dimensions and stabilityare related to the respective needs.

The stands are not only for the majorityof digital cameras, compacts and smal-ler SLRs, but are also suitable for indu-strial CCD and CMOS cameras.

There is also a range of suitablelighting units: from high-frequency fluorescents to basic tungsten lamplighting.

Lightweight Class


12.5-19.5 cm4.9-7.7 in.

79.5

cm

/ 3

1.3

in.

44.5 cm17.5 in.

5411RS 2 XA Camera Stand

Non-reflective matt grey baseboard withprinted fine grid and cm/inch scale. Matt-black anodised aluminum section tubecolumn with cm/inch scale. Hand-crankedheight adjustment by friction drive in plasticbearings. With horizontally adjustable came-ra arm to change the distance to thecolumn, moves approx. 7 cm (2.7 in.) backand forth. 1/4” mounting thread.

Baseboard (WxHxD): approx. 400 x 25 x500 mm (15.7 x 1 x 19.7 in.)Column height: approx. 76 cm (30 in.)Maximum load: 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs)

5450 RB 2 Lighting Unit

With four tiltable and adjustable reflectors onmounting arms which are in turn tiltable andadjustable in height. Lights can be switchedon separately. Suitable lamps: 4 x 150 w max.Clamp attachment for thickness up to 48 mm (1.8 in.).Cords: 2 x 1.7 m (5 1/2 ft.)Supplied without lamps.

3124/4356Opal Lamp

For RB 2 Lighting Unit.

4356: 75 W, 3000 K, E 27, 1100 Im. Average service live: 100 hrs.1 piece.

3124: 150 W, 3000 K, E 27, 2500 Im.Average service life: 100 hrs.1 piece.



5453-54RB 218 / RB 218 HFLighting Unit

Cold light lighting unit with two small lightbanks with one daylight fluorescent each.Lights are tiltable and adjustable in height.Angle of vertical arms adjustable by lockjoint. Mounted with strong die-cast clampbases. Clamping width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.)Separate control box.

Lamps: 2 x 18 wattColor temperature: 5400 KCRI = 90-100 (1A)

5453: Mains frequency operation5454: High frequency operation

(approx. 40 kHz)

5462RB 260 digital Lighting Unit

Cold light lighting unit with two small lightbanks with one daylight fluorescent each.Lights are tiltable and adjustable in height.Angle of vertical arms adjustable by lockjoint. Mounted with strong die-cast clampbases. Clamping width up to 48 mm (1.9 in.)Lamps can be switched on individually.

Lamps: 2 x 11 W, color temperatur 6000 K,color rendering group 1B. Suitable for usewith digital cameras and camcorders.


86

5458Replacement Lamp for RB 218

18 W, 5400 K, Light color 12, CRI = 90-100(1A), average service life 8000 hrs., socket 2 G 11, length 217 mm (8.5 in.). 1 piece.

5460Replacement Lamp for RB 260 digital

11 W, 6000 K, light color 11, color renderinggroup 1B, average service life 8000 hrs.Socket G 23, length 214 mm (8.4 in.). 1 piece.



5303R 2 CP Image Capturing Set

Portable camera stand with RB 260 digitalLighting Unit (5462).

Non-reflective matt grey baseboard withprinted fine grid and cm/inch scale. Matt-black anodised aluminum section tubecolumn with cm/inch scale. Hand-crankedheight adjustment by friction drive in plasticbearings. With horizontally adjustable came-ra arm to change the distance to thecolumn, moves approx. 7 cm (2.7 in.) backand forth. 1/4” mounting thread. Columnfolds down on baseboard.

Baseboard (WxHxD): approx. 400 x 25 x500 mm (15.7 x 1 x 19.7 in.)Column height: approx. 76 cm (30 in.)Maximum load: 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs)

RB 260 digital Lighting Unit with two smalllight banks, tiltable and adjustable in height.Angle of vertical arms adjustable by lockjoint. Mounted with strong die-cast clampbases. Lamps: 2 x 11 W, 6000 K, color ren-dering group 1B. Suitable for use with digitalcameras and camcorders.

Comes in strong carrying case 62 x 58 x 21 cm(24.4 x 22.8 x 8.3 in.) with handle and shoulder strap.


5301RS 2 CP Camera Stand

same as 5303, but without lighting unit. 5460

5301

64 c

m /

25.

2 in

.

37 cm14.5 in.

12.5-19.5 cm4.9-7.7 in.


88

Is it really possible to make somethingthat is innately rugged, sturdy and asvibration-resistant as possible stillsmaller, lighter and more „desktop-sui-table“? Individuals with very small bud-gets and very small cameras haveasked for that. And out of that requestcame the „reprokid“ - a small, light-weight, compact stand for small, light-weight, compact cameras.

This unit is „good enough“ for whereverthe requirement is for minimum spaceand light weight. And really: even theprice has moved accordingly.

The Story of „Repro the Kid“


5360„reprokid“ Camera Stand

Super-compact camera stand for small,lightweight cameras (APS, digital compacts,CCD cameras, etc.). Non-reflective, matt-black baseboard. Column with cm/inchscale. Height-adjustable camera arm. 1/4” mounting thread.

Baseboard (WxHxD): 32 x 1.9 x 38 cm (12.6 x 0.7 x 15 in.)Column height: 59 cm (23.2 in.)Max. load: 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)

Includes lighting unit with two E 27 screw-inmounts for lamps up to 250 Watt (supplied without lamps).Power cable: 2 x 2.5 m (8 ft. 2 in.)

Suitable lamps:

3128: Reflector lamp 150 W, 3200 K3127: Reflector lamp 250 W, 3400 K


5361„reprokid“ Camera Stand

Same as 5360, but without lighting unit.

5361

63.5

cm

/ 2

5 in

.

13 cm5.1 in.

38 cm15 in.

32 cm12.6 in.


90

Camera stands and lightingunits can solve almost all pro-

blems when capturing, digitizingor copying originals. But if the ori-

ginal itself is „reluctant“, if thephoto album refuses to

stay open or if theold wavy photo-

graph needs tobe flattened orthe press clip-ping should not

shift, then the little (or big-ger) helpers presented here, are ofgreat importance.

The 5901 Copy Plate is a reliable toolfor locating originals in a certian posi-tion. The 5903 Document Holder doesa similar job for smaller originals andallows the possibility to position the ori-ginal at any desired angle towards thecamera.

Especially when copying openedbooks or albums you have to fight thestubborness of the inanimate.Normally an open book will not lie flatand each page bends differently. Inthese cases a book cradle is veryhelpful, but often expensive.

The Kaiser Book Holder is a simplebut efficient solution to this problem:

A solid baseplate is covered with anon-slip coating. Preformed foam ele-ments of varying thickness are arran-ged in such a manner that the openedbook is compensated, yet a gap is leftdown the middle for the book spine. Afolding glass plate with hinges locatedin vertical slots exerts the necessarypressure to keep the page that is to becopied in a flat position. Moreover, partof the pressure is absorbed by thefoam elements under the book so thateven fragile books are treated with theutmost care.

The RLR Camera Arm (see page 91)should be used for page-by-pagecopying because the camera canalways be positioned precisely overthe corresponding page without havingto move the book for each shot.

Hold the Post!


5904Book Holder

43 x 41 cm (16.9 x 16.1 in.) sized, solidbaseplate with non-slip coating on top non-slip feet underneath. 6 mm (0.2 in.) thickglass plate, foldable and variable in height upto maximum 95 mm (3.7 in.).

Incl. 8 preformed foam elements for heightcompensation: 2x 20 mm (0.8 in.), 2x 10 mm (0.4 in.) and 4x 5 mm (0.2 in.),and two black cardboard sheets (each oneA4/letter size) so that the print on the backside cannot shine through the paper.

Dimensions (WxHxD): 465 x 130 x 450 mm(18.3 x 5.1 x 17.7 in.)

5539RLR Camera Arm

For Copylizer and R1 system camerastands. For page-by-page copying fromopened books or albums without moving theoriginal. Camera platform can be shifted toleft or right and locked in any position.Adjustable end-stops. Camera can bemounted in landscape or portrait position.

Moving distance of camera platform: 15 cm(5.9 in.) from center to right or left.



5901Copy Plate

Metal base plate with non-slip bottom surface.Top surface ist matt grey lacquer with 18 %reflection for determining exposure times.Printed grid lines with scales and DIN formatmarkings. 4 copy subject holders made ofpermanently magnetised section plastic. 4 sinkable grid pins at standard hole inter-vals. Wall mounting is possible.

Size of printed grid area: 460 x 340 mm (18.1 x 13.4 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): 500 x 10 x 380mm(19.7 x .4 x 15 in.)

92

5903Document Stage

Suitable for documents and originals up to210 x 148 mm (8.2 x 5.8 in.).

Two adjustable stop rails for accurate posi-tioning of the document. Fixing clamps canbe used in various positions.

Platform on ball head can be swivelled andtilted in all directions and pivots to 90°.Height adjustment (up to 40 mm/1.5 in.) withblocking screw. Spirit levels in platform andbase. Four individually adjustable feet.

Dimensions (WxHxD): 265 x 173 (213) x 210 mm (10.4 x 6.8 (8.4) x 8.3 in.)



5907-08Reflection Shield Avoids reflection of the camera body on

reflective originals. Attaches with holding ringin camera filter mount.

5907: For lenses with 62, 58 and 55 mm fil-ter thread

5908: For lenses with 55, 52 and 49 mm fil-ter thread

6385Spirit Level One level each for vertical and horizontal

shooting position. With mounting shoe and1/4” tripod bush.

Dimensions: approx. 20 x 25 x 35 mm (.8 x 1 x 1.4 in.)

6386Spirit Level Circular bubble in metal mounting, self-adhe-

sive. For permanent attachment to cameras,tripods etc. Can also be screwed on.

Diameter: approx. 25 mm (1 in.)

6388Adhesive Paste Permanently elastic putty for holding, sup-

porting and arranging photo objects. Theputty can be formed at will and sticks to theobject. It can be removed without leavingany residue.

Package with 250 g (8.8 oz.)


5990Adjusting Device For the exact alignment of the camera for

screen shots and repro photography.

Adjusting device with centred light diode,cable with cable switch and detachablethreaded ring with 58 mm screw-in thread.Adaptable to other filter threads with adapterrings. With compartment for 2 x 1.5 volt AAbatteries and velcro strip for fastening thecompartment to the tripod or camera stand.

Without batteries.

94

Got it Straight?

No, we do not talk about the photogra-pher, but we are touching on an impor-tant issue when capturing images froma vertical position.

If the film or chip plane and the originalplane are not in an exactly parallelposition, then we will get perspectivedistortions.

In any case you can check it using spi-rit levels, but the Enk adjusting devicewill really get it straight. Primarily desi-gned to align the camera when doingshots of monitors, it finds another use-ful application here. An LED is positio-ned exactly in the center in front of anSLR camera lens and a mirror on theoriginal plane. One look through theviewfinder shows it all: If the LED andits mirror image are not exactly mat-ching, you have to adjust the cameraor the object till you get them straight.



Even in the digital era a transparencyon chemical reversal film undisputedlyhas a good reputation. Its definition, itsresolution, its color rendition, in short -its quality is unquestioned.

Further the transparency is and remainsa unique copy. If you need more thanone piece, it has to be duplicated. If youneed it in your computer, it needs digi-tization.

Duplication means, that the originaltransparency, transilluminated by color-calibrated and even light, has to bephotographed once again on a suitablefilm, preferably a duplicating film. Slideduplicates can be produced conve-niently using a camera stand and thecolor head of a Kaiser color enlarger.

The color head, placed upside down in„reversed“ position, serves as the lightsource for the original. The shootingequipment - SLR camera, extensionand a suitable lens - is attached to thecamera arm.

The advantages of using the colorhead as a light source are firstly theconstant color temperature of the halo-gen cold light mirror lamp used, whichis standardized at 3200 Kelvin for thecolour sensitizing of artificial light duplicating films, and secondly thetrouble-free stepless correction filtrationby means of the dichroic filters.

For the digitization of slides filmscanners are a convenient and affor-dable solution, if we talk about 35mm film. Film scanners for mediumformat or larger slides exceed thebudget of the average user. Using ahigh-quality digital camera (with 3megapixels or more) with a suitablelens (top-quality telephoto or macrolens with little distortion and shadingand at suitable minimum shootingdistance) in combination with theKaiser slide copying system isan interesting alternative,especially when it ispossible to calibra-te the camerawith respect tothe predefinedcolor tempera-ture of the lightsource. And moreover:you will always be faster this waythan with a film or slide scanner.

3-D: Definition, Duplication, Digitization


5972Slide Copying System

For slides up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.).Consisting of a color head with dichroicinterference filters, white-light lever, densitydiaphragm, 12 V dichroic mirror halogenlamp, 100 W, 3200 K, diffuser for uniformillumination, cooling blower for continuousoperation, compound negative carrier withfour continuously variable masking strips,negative mask for 35 mm mounted slides,holder and hood for reversed color head,and one set of test slides.

Required: 4451 transformer (with electronicvoltage stabiliser) or 4453 (without voltagestabiliser).

5975 Slide Copying System

Comprises color head with dichroic interfe-rence filters, white-light lever, density dia-phragm, 12 V dichroic mirror halogen lamp,100 W, 3200 K, diffuser for uniform illumina-tion,as well as transformer, compound nega-tive carrier with four continuously variablemasking strips, negative mask for 35 mmmounted slides, holder and hood for reversedcolor head, and one set of test slides.

5969Test Slides

For determining picture frame for copying1:1. For determining correct exposure timesfor cropping and as an aid to establishingexposure, filtration and focus.

The set consists of 3 framed 35 mm slides.

96

4459

4459



5979Slide Copying Kit Consists of holder and cover for the up-

turned color head. Allows the use of anyKaiser colour head as light source for slidecopying.

5973Cooling Blower Module For the 5975 Slide Copying System

(produced as from 5/97). The blower can beattached to any Kaiser lighting head using a100 W halogen lamp. Separate power supp-ly via the included mains adapter.

4544Color Head Dichroic interference filters, calibrated in den-

sitometric units up to 180, dials indirectly illu-minated. White-light lever with control light.Continuously adjustable, illuminated densityaperture up to 60 densitometric densities (= two aperture settings). Best possible lightdistribution due to special diffusor screen.UV filter and IR filter. Drawer for additional fil-ters 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.). Operationonly with transformer 4451 or 4453.Supplied with halogen cold-light mirror lamp12 V, 100 W.

5974Conversion Filter To be exchanged with the filter drawer of the

color head. Required if slide copying is donewith daylight film.

Dimensions: approx. 8.5 x 8.5 cm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

4451/53Transformer 4451: Transformer with starting-current limita-

tion and electronic voltage stabilization.

4453: Without voltage stabilization.

4459


98

59764 x 5“ Slide Copying Adapter To duplicate slides up to 4 x 5“ in conjunc-

tion with the 5972/5975 Kaiser SlideCopying Systems or with the 4544 ColorMixing Head. The adapter is mounted on theturned over color mixing head. Supplied withadapter plate so that a Kaiser negative carri-er can be positioned on the slide copying adapter.

4584 Compound Negative Carrier for 7 x 7 cm Slides

For mounted 6 x 6 slides with outer dimen-sions 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8 in.). Four steplesslyadjustable masking strips for selecting thedesired detail.

4583Compound Negative Carrier For use with all negative masks and glass

inserts sized 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.).Adjustable guide pins for various film widths.Four steplessly adjustable masking strips.Two register pins.

4489 Negative Mask for 5 x 5 cm Slides For mounted slides with outer dimensions

5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.). For insertion into 4583Compound Negative Carrier.Dimensions: 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.)

4129Film Loader For loading bulk 35-mm film into cartridges

in daylight. For bulk film material up to 30 m(98 ft.). With frame counter and remaining-film meter.Dimensions: approx. 130 x 110 x 80 mm

(5.1 x 4.3 x 3.1 in.)

4124/27Film Cartridges For 35 mm film.

For self-loading with bulk film material.Clamp fastener in reel axle.

4124: Metal type, 5 pcs.4127: Plastic type, 5 pcs.


04_Scanning Cameras 25.06.2004 13:16 Uhr Seite 99

100

Scanning in Three Dimensions

When you speak about „scanning“ youwould normally associate this with cap-turing a two-dimensional original. Theflatbed scanner in the mind’s eye isfound today on almost any office deskand in many home offices.

But three-dimensional scanning isnothing extraordinary, it’s plain andsimple digital photography using amoving CCD line instead of an array.The only restriction: The subjects mustnot move and continuous light is a must.

The advantage: a scannercamera provides extreme-

ly high resolution at acomparatively low price.

The Scando icoss issuch a camera. It isboth a repro scannerand a camera for three-

dimensional objects. Itcombines the high-quality

results of a flatbed scannerwith the versatility of a camera.

The Scando scanning camera is acapable tool for those,• who need high resolution image data

for high-quality printed products• who need finest detail rendition for

analysis and measuring • who need large enlargements without

pixelation for verifying and identification• who need to scan valuable or fragile

originals without contact

• who file high-resolution image datafor subsequent use.

Both the „35 mm scanners“ icoss/3and icoss/7 (29 x 37 mm scanningarea) accept Nikon lenses, the icoss/5(43 x 43 mm scanning area) and theicoss/9 (29 x 43 mm scanning area)take enlarging lenses with M 39 (Leicathread). A focussing device is suppliedwith the camera.

Aspect ratio and framing is determinedby the choice of lens and the distancefrom the object. Detail and sharp focuscan be controlled conveniently thesame way as with an SLR using thereflex viewfinder with split image andmicro prism spot.

The complete scanning procedureneeds only one pass of the triple CCDline. The color depth of 12 bits percolor provides for more shadow detailsand higher dynamic range.

Data transmission to your computer isvia a FireWire (IEEE 1394) interface,providing transmission speeds up to400 Mbit per second.

The Scando icoss cameras come withthe popular SilverFast scanner soft-ware running on Windows andMacIntosh computers. IT8 targets forcolor calibration in reflected and trans-mitted light are also supplied with thecamera.


101101Scanning Cameras

Flat large-format originals which do notfit on a flatbed scanner, can be captu-red in total or in detail using reflectivelight. In this application the Scandoserves as a repro scanner for prints,art works, paintings, maps etc. as wellas for reproductions from books.

Transparent originals like large-formattransparencies, glass negatives, x-rayfilms and CTs can be scanned with theScando mounted on a camera standand using transmitted light.

Application possibilities for using theScando as a „scanner“ for capturingthree-dimensional still objects are asdiverse as the objects themselves. Thisincludes catalog photography, packshots, photography for medical, scienti-fic, documentary or measuring purpo-ses, for law enforcement or industrialquality assurance.

Additional fields of application for theScando icoss/3 and Scando icoss/7include mounting to a microscope oras a digital back on a view camera.


5120-23„Scando icoss“ Scanning Camera The Scando icoss is a repro scanner and a

camera for three-dimensional subjects. It provides high resolution image files - forprepress, and for quantitative and qualitativedetail analysis for permanent documentationand archiving.Supplied without lens.

102

5120 5121 5122 5123Scando Scando Scando Scando icoss/3 icoss/5 icoss/7 icoss/9

Type Digital scanning camera/SLR type

Viewfinder Reflex viewfinder with split image and microprism spot for focussing

Lens mount Nikon Bayonet Helical focussing Nikon Bayonet Helical focussingmount M 39x1 mount M 39 x 1

CCD sensor: Triple line 3 x 3648 pixels 3 x 5363 pixels 3 x 8192 pixels 3 x 8192 pixels

Scanning area 29 x 37 mm 43 x 43 mm 29 x 37 mm 29 x 43 mm

Pixels 3648 x 4625 5363 x 5363 8192 x 10550 8192 x 12300

Camera resolution 16,8 mill. pixels 28,8 mill. pixels 86,4 mill. pixels 100 mill. pixels

Maximum file size 8 bit processing 48 MB 82 MB 247 MB 288 MB

16 bit processing 96 MB 164 MB 494 MB 576 MB

Color depth 3 x 12 Bit 3 x 12 Bit 3 x 12 Bit 3 x 12 Bit

Dynamics (D max) 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

Output resolution on letter format (optical) max. 400 dpi max. 600 dpi max. 900 dpi max. 900 dpi

Contrast range 11 f-stops

Interface IEEE 1394 (FireWire/iLink)

Software supplied SilverFast with Photoshop Plug-In and Twain driver

Accessories included FireWire cable, carrying case, IT8 targets (reflective, transmitted)

Operating system Windows 2000, Windows ME, Windows XP, Mac OS 9.0

System requirements Pentium 300 MHz orbetter or Mac G4, RAM: 128 MB or more,HD: 10 GB or more

Pentium 400 MHz orbetter or Mac G4, RAM: 128 MB or more,HD: 10 GB or more

Pentium 1 GHz or better or Mac G4, RAM: 512MB or more,HD: 20GB or more

Pentium 1 GHz or better or Mac G4, RAM: 512MB or more,HD: 20GB or more


5106Nikon LensAF 50 mm / 1.8 D

Standard lens for Scando icoss/3 andicoss/7 Camera Scanners.

Focal length: 50 mmMax. aperture: 1:1.8Coverage: 46°Optical design: 6 elements in 5 sectionsMin. distance: 45 cm (18 in.)Aperture scale: 1.8 - 22Diaphragm: automaticFilter thread: 52 mmDimensions: 63 mm ø x 39 mm

(2.5 in. ø x 1.5 in.)Weight: 160 g (5.6 oz.)

5107Nikon LensAF Micro 60 mm / 2.8 D

Macro lens for Scando icoss/3 and icoss/7Camera Scanners.

Focal length: 60 mmMax. aperture: 1:2.8Scale ratio: 1:1Coverage: 39°Optical design: 8 elements in 7 sectionsMin. distance: 22 cm (8.7 in.)Aperture scale: 2.8 - 32Diaphragm: automaticFilter thread: 62 mmDimensions: 70 mm ø x 74.5 mm

(2.8 in. ø x 2.9 in.)Weight: 440 g (15.5 oz.)

4328Rodenstock LensRodagon WA 4.0/60 mm

Camera lens for Scando icoss/5 and icoss/9Camera Scanners.Optical design: 6 elementsAperture scale: 4 - 22Diaphragm: preset, click-stopFilter thread: 40.5 mm x 0.75Dimensions: 41 mm x ø 50 mm

(1.6 in. x ø 2 in.)

103Scanning Cameras

4350Schneider LensApo-Componon HM 4.0/60 mm

Camera lens for Scando icoss/5 and icoss/9Camera Scanners.Optical design: 6 elementsAperture scale: 4 - 22Diaphragm: preset, click-stopFilter thread: 43 mm x 0.75Dimensions: 43.2 mm x ø 46 mm

(1.7 in. x ø 1.8 in.)

4350

4328


104

5090Tripod Sturdy camera tripod for light to medium-

heavy cameras. Tall centre column for alarge working height. Fixed setting angle forlegs. Handy wing screws. Combined with5091 Head ideal for Scando icoss scannercameras.

Without tripod head.

Setting height: approx. 56 - 170 cm (22 - 66.9 in.)

Closed length: approx. 61 cm (24 in.)Weight: approx. 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs)Thread: 3/8“Load: max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs)

5091Tripod Head 3D tilt-and-pan head for 5090 tripod,

with quick-change system.

Simple to use, for Scando icoss scannercameras and 35 mm and medium formatcameras.

Can be adjusted in three levels mit separateblocking handles. Integrated quick-releaseconnector with safety lock.

Pan: 360°Tilt: -30° +90°Sideway tilt: -90° +30°Height: approx. 13 cm (5.1 in.)Weight: approx. 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)Tripod thread: 3/8“Camera mounting thread: 3/8“Load: max. 6 kg (13.2 lbs)


05_Light Boxes 25.06.2004 13:19 Uhr Seite 105

106

Light is the elixir of life in photo-graphy. This not only applies to the

light you need when shooting a picture,but in addition to the lighting conditionswhen viewing the results.

Light is needed to illuminate and totransilluminate depending on whetherthe subject is reflective or transparent.

A light box is the appropriate tool totransilluminate a transparent original. Itseems at a first glance that this mustbe the simplest of all light sources:Take a square box, put some lamps init, cover it with diffusion - done. Withoutdoubt, this is a light source, but mostlikely completely inappropriate for aphotographic application.

Because there are stringent require-ments for „transmitted light sources“. Themost important one is evenness: everyspot on the luminous surface shouldhave the same brightness, or - to put itin correct technical terms - luminance ofthe viewing area should be constant, theinevitable edge drop may not exceed acertain critical value. This is equallyimportant for viewing and inspecting slides as for photographic reproductionor duplication of transparent originals.Selected materials for the lit surface, awell-balanced design of interior reflec-tors and light conduction techniques areused to meet these requirements.

Luminous Surfaces


107107Light Boxes

If you have to inspect color qualities ofa transparency or if you want to capturea color original, then it is important that the light box has the correct colorproperties. Fluorescent lamps with day-light-type spectrum, a well-definedcolor temperature and a high color ren-dition index are required. Reflectorsand diffusion material have to stay„neutral“, they must not effect the colorrendition.

If the transilluminated original is notviewed by the human eye but with acamera, we have to add further requi-rements. For example there must be aminimum luminance in order to reachpractical f-numbers or the luminancemust be particularly high to capturespecific details.

If the viewing „eye“ belongs to a digitalcamera, then there could be additionalrequirements to the stability of thelight. Very often flicker-free lighting isimportant, and that is achieved byhigh-frequency operating systems forthe fluorescent lamps. For extremelycritical applications a residual ripplesuppression might be indispensible.

Even fluorescents generate a certainamount of heat, and if you have to usemany lamps in a light box to achieve ahigh illuminance, it might be necessaryto take precautions to reduce the ther-mal load of the originals - an effectivecooling system has to be integrated.

But there are still other needs andrequirements, for example battery ope-ration on small and portable lightboxes. If these - in addition - are extremely flat, they can easily be stowed away in a bag or a briefcase.

The Kaiser light boxes described onthe following pages have different fea-tures according to the potential require-ments. Now you only have to choosethe appropriate size and then you haveyour luminous surface.


2420-22„slimlite“ Light Box

A compact and handy, super-flat daylightlight box. Uniform illumination as a result ofspecial light conducting and reflecting technology in conjunction with cold-cathodefluorescent tubes. Service life: approx.10,000 hours. Color temperature approx.5000 Kelvin (± 5%). ON/OFF switch.Protective cover included.

2420: Viewing area: approx. 10 x 12.5 cm (4 x 5 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 16 x 1.4 x 15 cm (6.3 x 0.6 x 5.9 in.)Weight: approx. 260 g (9.2 oz)Battery powered: 6 x 1.5 V AAA-typeMains operation: with mains adapter 2419Supplied without batteries or mainsadapter.

2421: Viewing area: approx. 18 x 13 cm (7 x 5 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 22 x 2.1 x 19 cm (8.7 x 0.8 x 7.5 in.)Weight: approx. 770 g (1 lbs. 11 oz)Battery powered: 6 x 1.5 V AA-typeMains operation: with mains adapter 2419Supplied without batteries or mains adapter.

2422: Viewing area: approx. 30 x 20 cm (12 x 8 in.)Light box with fold-out feet and clam-ping strip.Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 37 x 2.5 x 28 cm (14.6 x 1 x 11 in.)Weight: approx. 1.950 g (4 lbs. 5 oz.)Mains operation with separate mainsadapter (included).

2419Mains Adapter

To operate the 2420 and 2421 "slimlite" lightboxes on the mains.

108


2417-18„slimlite“ Light Box

Extremely flat daylight light boxes. Even illu-mination achieved by using a special methodof light conduction and reflection. Color tem-perature approx. 5000 Kelvin. On/Off switch.With clamping bar and fold-out bracket. Canbe wall-mounted.

2417: Illuminated area: approx. 46 x 20,5 cm(18.1 x 8.1 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 55 x 3x 30,5 cm (21.7 x 1.2 x 12 in.)Lamps: 2 x 13 WMains adapter: 24 V, 1 A

2418: Illuminated area: approx. 46 x 30,5 cm(18.1 x 12 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 55 x 3x 40,5 cm (21.7 x 1.2 x 15.9 in.)Lamps: 2 x 13 WMains adapter: 24 V, 2 A

109Light Boxes

2135


2403-06/2423-26/2433-36„prolite basic 2“ Light Box

5000 Kelvin color temperature. Uses special fluorescent tubes for high color fidelity. Color rendition index CRI = 90-100.

High-quality acrylic-glass plate of excep-tionally uniform transmission over the entire visible spectral range. Robust, all-metal housing with non-slip rubber feet andthe possibility to mount the light box on awall. ON/OFF switch.

Sorting attachment for 30 or 70 mounted35mm slides (only for light boxes with a vie-wing area of 30 x 21 cm (11.8 x 8.3 in.) and50 x 30 cm (19.7 x 11.8 in.)).2 m (6 ft. 7 in.) power supply cable.

2403-06: Basic versions. Mains frequencyoperation.

2423-26: as 2403-2406, but with additionalintegrated high-frequency opera-ting system (operating frequencyapprox. 40 kHz) for flicker-freestart-up and operation.

2433-36: as 2423-2426, but with additionalbrightness control for continuouslyvariable dimming down to 10% of maximum light output.

2406 is not available in 120 V.

110

2136,2476, 2477

2146, 2474


Survey: prolite basic 2

Code Illuminated Lamps Dimensions Special features Replacement lampsarea (cm/inch) (Set of 2 or 4 lamps)

2403 30 x 21 cm 2 x 8 W 33.5 x 6 x 27.5 247411.8 x 8.3 in 13.2 x 2.4 x 10.8

2423 30 x 21 cm 2 x 8 W 33.5 x 6 x 27.5 HF 247411.8 x 8.3 in 13.2 x 2.4 x 10.8

2433 30 x 21 cm 2 x 8 W 33.5 x 6 x 27.5 HF, dimmable 247411.8 x 8.3 in 13.2 x 2.4 x 10.8

2405 50 x 30 cm 2 x 13 W 56 x 6 x 36.5 247619.7 x 11.8 in 22 x 2.4 x 14.4

2425 50 x 30 cm 2 x 13 W 56 x 6 x 36.5 HF 247619.7 x 11.8 in 22 x 2.4 x 14.4

2435 50 x 30 cm 2 x 13 W 56 x 6 x 36.5 HF, dimmable 247619.7 x 11.8 in 22 x 2.4 x 14.4

2406 50 x 60 cm 4 x 13 W 56 x 6 x 66.5 247719.7 x 23.6 22 x 2.4 x 26.3

2426 50 x 60 cm 4 x 13 W 56 x 6 x 66.5 HF 247719.7 x 23.6 22 x 2.4 x 26.3

2436 50 x 60 cm 4 x 13 W 56 x 6 x 66.5 HF, dimmable 247719.7 x 23.6 22 x 2.4 x 26.3

111Light Boxes


2492-93„prolite scan SC“ Light Box

Professional light box for transparent ori-ginals of all types, e.g. slides, negatives, X-rays and microfiches. Color temperature5000 Kelvin. Four Dulux fluorescent lampswith high color reproduction quality CRI =90-100. Very high lighting power: approx.50.000 lux. High-frequency operation system(frequency approx. 40 kHz) for flicker-freestart-up and running. So especially suitableas backlight source for use with camerascanners. There are also no stroboscopiceffects, hum and induction infererence. Veryquite vibration-free fan cooling permitsunlimited continuous operation with mini-mum heating of the viewing surface.Operating hours counter. Cm and inch sca-les on the working surface. Non-slip rubberfeet. Can be wall-mounted. On/off switch.Cord 2.5 m (8.2 ft.)

Illuminated area: approx. 48 x 44 cm(18.9 x 17.3 in.) Lamps: 4 x 55 W, 5400 KDimensions (WxHxD): approx. 63 x 9 x 53,5 cm (24.8 x 3.5 x 21.1 in.)

2493 with additional brightness control forcontinuously variable dimming down to 10% of maximum light output.

2395 DC Voltage Mains Adapter

For residual ripple suppression (<1%) ondevices fitted with high-frequency lighting systems and in conjunction with highly sen-sitive camera systems.Max. load: 400 W


112

2395

2414,2487


2170„handylite“ Light Case

Compact monocoque case with daylightlight box and integrated mains transformer.Color temperature 5000 Kelvin. Fluorescentlamps with high color rendition quality. CRI = 90-100.

Illuminated area: approx. 25 x 20 cm (9.8 x 7.9 in.).

Lamps: 2 x 8 W, 5400 K.Dimensions: approx. 400 x 335 x 95 mm

(15.7 x 13.2 x 3.7 in.)

2139/2120„hobbylite“ Light Box

2139: "hobbylite 1" Light BoxDaylight light box for battery and mains operation. With fold-out support, clampingstrip and facilities for wall mounting. ON/OFFswitch. Supplied with 8 x magnifier and 9 Vmains adapter. Without batteries.

Viewing area: approx.25 x 15 cm (9.8 x 5.9“)Illumination: 1 x 8 Watt, 5400 KelvinDimensions (WxHxD): approx. 31 x 6 x 22 cm

(12.2 x 2.4 x 8.7 in.)

2120: "hobbylite 2" Light BoxDaylight light box for mains operation. Springclamping strip, fold-down support for hori-zontal and vertical format, facilities for horizontal and vertical wall mounting,scale in cm/inch, and ON/OFF switch. Supplied with 12 V mains adapter.

Viewing area: approx.32 x 26 cm (12.6 x 10.2“)Illumination: 2x 8 Watt, 5400 KelvinDimensions (WxHxD): approx. 40 x 8 x 34 cm

(15.7 x 3.1 x 13.4 in.)

113Light Boxes

2146,2474

2120

2139

2133


Code Wattage Socket Lenght Tube ø Quantity for light box(w/o pins) (pieces)

Tube 2133 8 W G 5 288 mm 16 mm 1 2120, 2139form 2146 8 W G 5 288 mm 16 mm 1 2170, 2403/23/33

2474 8 W G 5 288 mm 16 mm 2 2170, 2403/23/33

2135 13 W G 5 517 mm 16 mm 2 2417/18

2136 13 W G 5 517 mm 16 mm 1 2405-06, 2425-26, 2435-36

2476 13 W G 5 517 mm 16 mm 2 2405, 2425, 24352477 13 W G 5 517 mm 16 mm 4 2406, 2426, 2436

Dulux 2414 55 W 2 G 11 533 mm 2 x 1 2492-9317,5 mm

2487 55 W 2 G 11 533 mm 2 x 4 2492-9317,5 mm

114

Fluorescent Lamps

Replacement lamps for light boxes and lightcases. Color temperature 5400 Kelvin, lightcolor 12. Color rendition index CRI = 90-100.average service life: 8000 hours (with con-stant color temperature). If very accuratecolor reproduction is needed, fluorescentlamps should be replaced in sets.

8 W 13 W 55 W


06_Slide Accesso 25.06.2004 13:23 Uhr Seite 115

Tools for Manual Workers

116

Talk about „image processing“ todayand you can be pretty sure that thismeans using the computer to do it.You may also find quite a number ofdigital photographers viewing their digitized slides on a digital, virtual lightbox, sorting, marking and archivingthem on their computer desktop.Besides the necessary knowledge andthe appropriate computer equipment, a strong hand for the mouse and anagile finger for the mouse click is allthe „physical effort“ that is required.

But there are alsothe committed manual workers, who –away from resolution problems andcolor management discussions – cutand frame their processed slide film,view it with „real“ magnifiers, sort andfile it and prepare it for projection. Thistype of „image processing“ needs theproper tools also, and that’s what weare talking about here.


3

21

117117Slied Accessories

A semi-automatic slide-mountingmachine like the Kaiser „diamount“ forthe C.A.M. system can be a tremen-dous convenience. C.A.M. stands for„cut and mount“ and indicates that bothare done with one unit. The 35 mm filmstrip is simply fed into the unit, can beviewed through a foldable magnifierabove an illuminated area, is movedinto the opened slide mount and finallyis cut straight, neatly and precisely withone single movement of the hand. Themount is removed from the unit andsnaps shut automatically – done. Theglassless C.A.M. slide mounts that areused with the unit, have one significant

difference compared to other mounts:They open from the side, not from thetop. They provide for secure positio-ning, have a secure snap lock (whichcan also be opened again), featurerounded-off bevelled corners fortrouble-free use in the projector andcan be stored spill-safe in space-saving CS slide magazines.

Those who prefer another type of slidemount use a good slide cutter like the„diacut 1“. The precisely guided rotaryblade guarantees a cut exactly therewhere you want it.

Next comes a thorough first viewing ofthe slides, still without too much effort,i.e. setting up projector and screen. Forfirst brillant impressions a simple AC orbattery-operated slide viewer withbright illumination and optically cleanlenses can do the job. And nothing is

as easy as grabbing a compact foldingviewer like the „diascop modulo“ and abunch of slides and see some friendsto view the results of last weekend’sgarden party.

The multitude of different slide mountson the market could indicate that thereis not a suitable mount for everybody.Everybody has his preferences, hisgood or bad experiences and in theend sticks to the type of mount he likes

best. This means, that he himselfcuts and mounts his slide films. With36 pictures on one film and possib-ly five rolls of film for a summerholiday, this could become a prettytedious post-holiday occupation.


4

118

56

Sorting slides is advisable for severalreasons. Especially when you preparethe slides for projection it is best toorganize them in an effective and logi-cal order and then put them into themagazine. Simple sorting desks or lightboxes will do the job.

In the end archiving is all that is left to be done. You may use either

slide trays with the slides ready for pro-jection and which in turn can be storedin stackable boxes or cases, or youcan file them in special transparentslide storage pages, which can easilybe placed on a light box.

This is also a convenient moment tolabel or mark the slides. This is verypractical when you try to find a particu-lar slide out of hundreds or thousands.There are special marking pens, thewriting will remain permanently on allsmooth surfaces like slide frames orCD Roms or even on RC paper.


2167-68 „diamount C.A.M./CS“ Slide Cutterand MounterConvenient cutting and automatic mountingof 35mm transparencies in C.A.M. andC.A.M./CS mounts. Easy and precise cuttingwith self-sharpening rotary blade in closedplastic housing. The film is automatically helddown while cutting. Sprung friction-wheeltransport for uniform advance of the filmstrip right up to the last frame. Illuminatedviewing area with format marks and fixingmarks to insert the mounted slides. 2.5xfold-up magnifier, completely detachable.Connection for mains adapter 2009 (optionalaccessory). Supplied with spare bulb (2107).Battery operated: 2 x 1.5 V C-type (not included)Bulb: 2.5 V, 0.3 A, E 10, frostedDimensions (WxHxD): approx.17 x 8.3 x 11 cm

(6.7 x 3.3 x 4.3 in.)

2167: Without slide mounts2168: Combi-Start Kit: includes 200 slide

mounts C.A.M.-SYSTEM CS

2009Mains TransformerFor mains operation of 2167-68 SlideCutting and Mounting Unit and of 2005 Slideviewer.Output: 2.5 V/250 mA sec. Cord: 2 m (6.6 ft.), with plug

according to DIN 45323Dimensions (WxHxD): 46 x 52 x 57 mm

(1.8 x 2 2.2 in.)

2156-57C.A.M./CS Slide MountsOne-piece glassless snap-down slide mount, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), as defined inDIN 108, for automatic mounting withC.A.M./CS slide cutters and mounters.Manual mounting is also possible. Clampingstrip to secure and accurately position thetransparency. Guide rail for exact position ofthe transparency during automatic mounting.Mount thickness 1.8 mm (0.07 in.). For CS,LKM and Paximat Compact magazines.

2156: Pack of 1002157: Pack of 200 + 20


2107


2115„diacut 1“ Slide Cutter Slide cutter for film cassettes, cartridges size

126 and 35 mm film. Very easy and accuratecut by self-sharpening rotating round bladein closed plastic housing. Film transport rol-ler for exact size positioning at frame line.Size markings for 18 x 24, 24 x 24, 28 x 28,and 24 x 36 mm. Fingertip recesses for easyremovel of cut slide. Illuminated viewingzone. Detachable lift-up 2.5 x magnifyingglass. Alignment markings for use withmounted slides.

Lamp: 10 W, E 14, pear-shapedCord: 1.8 m (6 ft.)Dimensions: approx. 125 x 95 x 100 mm

(4.9 x 3.3 x 3.9 in.)

2152„dia SR“ Slide Mount One-piece glassless plastic mount, 5 x 5 cm

(2 x 2 in.), with snap-down mask. The slideis in place as soon as it is laid on base of themount. Guide pins for quick and easy fitting.4-point snap lock provides absolute flatnessand prevents the mount from coming openby itself. Can be used in almost all slidetrays. Excellently suited to LKM magazines.Frame thickness: 1.8 mm (.07 in.)

Supplied in boxes of 100.

2158CS Slide Mount One-piece glassless snap-down slide mount,

5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), as defined in DIN 108.Clamping strip to secure and accuratelyposition the transparency. Rounded cornersfor smooth guidance through the projector.Mount thickness 1.8 mm (0.07 in.). For CS,LKM and Paximat Compact magazines.Spacesaving, non-spill slide storage in CSmagazines.

Pack of 300.

120

2109


2021„diascop modulo“ Slide Viewer

Modular designed multi-purpose slide viewer.

Slide viewer for mounted slides with mountsup to 3 mm (0.1 in.) thick, and for film stripsin protective sleeves. Cold light source withhigh light output on 39 x 39 (1.5 x 1.5 in.)viewing area. Magnifier folds up or foldsdown flat to the top of the unit.

2.5 x magnifier is detachable for use as ahand-held magnifier or as a desktop magni-fier in conjunction with the supplied stand.

The light source is an Osram DULUX MINItorch, that can be removed form the viewerand used separately. It is fitted with a 3 Wattpower-economising bulb of 8000 hours ser-vice life, luminous intensity: approx. 10000Lux, Colour temperature: approx. 4000Kelvin. With fastening clip and ON/OFFswitch

Battery operation: 2 x 1.5 AA (Not suppliedwith the unit)



2003„diascop 1“ Slide Viewer Slide viewer with 2x magnifying lens for

framed slides, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), and uncutfilm strips in protective sleeves.On/off switch.

Battery operation: 2 x 1.5 V C-size(supplied without batteries) Lamp: 2.5 V, .3 amp., E10, sphericalLens: 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): 80 x 160 x 170 mm

(3.1 x 6.3 x 6.7 in.)

2005„diascop 3“ Slide Viewer Slide viewer with 3 x magnifying double lens

for framed slides, 5 x 5 (2 x 2 in.), and uncutfilm strips in protective sleeves. Drop chutewith collecting tray. On/off switch andconnecting socket for mains transformer2009.

Battery operation: 2 x 1.5 V C-size(supplied without batteries)Lamp: 2.5 V, .3 amp., E10, sphericalLens: 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in)Dimensions (WxHxD): 80 x 160 x 170 mm

(3.1 x 6.3 x 6.7 in.)

2006„diascop 4“ Slide Viewer As 2005, but for connecting to mains.

Lamp: 15 W, E 14, pear-shapedCord: approx. 1.8 m (6 ft.)Dimensions (WxHxD): 80 x 160 x 170 mm

(3.1 x 6.3 x 6.7 in.)

122

2009 Mains TransformerFor mains operation of 2005 Slide Viewerand 2167-68 Slide Cutter and Mounter.

2107

2107

2008


2010-11 „diascop mini“ Slide ViewerSmall compact slide viewer for framed slides5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.). With hinged prop.Required batteries:2 x 1,5 V AA-size (sup-

plied without batteries)Lamp: 2,5 V, 0,3 A, E 10, sphericalLens: 63 x 53 mm (2.5 x 2.1 in.)Dimensions approx. 75 x 60 x 105 mm(WxHxD): (3 x 2.4 x 4.1 in.)2010: with 3-fold magnifying double lens2011: with 2-fold magnifying lens

2012 Slide ViewerFor framed slides, 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.), andfilm strips in protective sleeves. Lens diameter18 mm (.7 in.) Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.55 x 55 x 60 mm (2.2 x 2.2 x 2.4 in.)


2015„diascop 50 N“ Slide Viewer

Slide viewer with 3x magnifying double lensfor 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.) framed slides anduncut film strips, change slider for convenientslide changing without annoying bright intervals, drop chute for up to 40 slides. Topsection tiltable for adjusting desired viewingangle, mains connection.

Lamp: 15 W, E 14, pear-shapedLenses: 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.)Cord: 1,8 m (6 ft.)Dimensions approx.150 x 80 x 175 mm(WxHxD): (5.9 x 3.1 x 6.9 in.)

2008

2107 89338 x 2012

2012


2124Slide Viewer and Sorter

For 30 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.) slides. Convenienttable-top design. Good color reproductionthanks to special surface material.

Lamp: candle-shaped lamp 25 W, E 14Cord: 1,8 m (6 ft.)Dimensions approx. 33.5 x 10.5 x 26 cm(WxHxD): (17.1 x 5.1 x 14 in.)

2139/2120„hobbylite“ Light Box

2139: "hobbylite 1" Light BoxDaylight light box for battery and mains operation. With fold-down support, clampingstrip and facilities for wall mounting. ON/OFFswitch. Supplied with 8 x magnifier and 9 Vmains adapter. Without batteries.Viewing area: approx. 25 x 15 cm

(9.8 x 5.9 in.)Illumination: 1 x 8 Watt, 5400 KelvinDimensions approx. 31 x 6 x 22 cm(WxHxD): (12.2 x 2.4 x 8.7 in.)

2120: "hobbylite 2" Light BoxDaylight light box for mains operation. Springclamping strip, fold-down support for hori-zontal and vertical format, facilities for hori-zontal and vertical wall mounting, scale incm/inch, ON/OFF switch. Supplied with 12 Vmains adapter.Viewing area: approx. 32 x 26 cm

(12.6 x 10.2 in.)Illumination: 2 x 8 Watt, 5400 KelvinDimensions approx. 40 x 8 x 34 cm(WxHxD): (15.7 x 3.1 x 13.4 in.)

124

2112

2120

21392133



2035/39Labelling Pens Non-smearing, for labelling slide frames, CD

ROMs and plastic-coated photo paper. Alsosuitable for plastic, glass, metal and othersmooth surfaces.Quick-drying.

2035: black2039: set consisting of one pen in black,

red, green and blue

2570-2790Transparent Slide Storage Pages For orderly and safe storing and filing of

mounted slides.

For detailed information see page 140.

2500Filing Binder Special-sized 4-ring binder for Kaiser

Transparent Slide Sleeves and NegativeFiling Sheets.

For detailed information see page 140.

10 pens each in black, red,green, blue

2040

40 pens in black

2041


126

2203-04CS Slide Trays For space-saving, non-spill storage of slides

in CS mounts. Suitable for CS-compatible35mm slide projectors. Two CS slide trays,each one holding 100 slides, in stackablebox with transparent lid. Trays and stackablebox made of impact-resistant plastic.

Dimensions of the stackable box (WxHxD):approx. 130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x11.8 in.)

2203: Box with two trays2204: Two boxes, each with two trays

2207CS Slide Trays For space-saving, non-spill storage of slides

in CS mounts. Suitable for CS-compatible35mm slide projectors.Two CS slide trays, each holding 100 slides,in stackable box with drawer. Trays andstackable box made of impact-resistant pla-stic.

Dimensions of stackable box (WxHxD): approx. 130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x11.8 in.)

2217Universal Slide Trays For the storage of 35 mm slides. Suitable for

most 35 mm slide mounts and for almost all35 mm slide projectors. Universal slide traysand stacking box made of impact-proof plastic.Stacking box with label field on hinged lid.

Set with 3 stackable boxes, each fitted with2 universal slide trays for 50 slides each.

Dimensions of stacking box (WxHxD):130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x 11.8 in.)

2213Universal DIN Slide Trays To store mounted 35mm slides. Suitable for

most 35mm slide mounts and almost all35mm slide projectors. Two slide trays, eachholding 50 slides, in a stackable box. Trays and stackable box made of impact-resistant plastic. Trays as defined in German standard DIN 108.

Dimensions of stackable box (WxHxD): approx. 130 x 65 x 300 mm (5.1 x 2.6 x 11.8 in.)


2206Slide Case Handy case with four CS slide trays, each

holding 100 35mm slides in CS orC.A.M./CS mounts. Case and CS slide traysmade of impact-resistant plastic.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 300 x 62 x 350 mm (11.8 x 2.4 x 13.8 in.)

2219Slide Case Compact case for storing 35 mm slides.

With six universal slide trays each for fifty 35mm slides. Suitable for most slide mountsand for almost all 35 mm slide projectors.

Inside of cover can be used as a projectionscreen.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.290 x 63 x 425 mm (11.4 x 2.5 x 16.7 in.)

2218Slide Archive For storing 35 mm slides. With ten universal

slide trays each for fifty 35 mm slides.Suitable for most slide mounts and foralmost all 35 mm slide projectors.

With carrying handle.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx.125 x 350 x 287 mm (4.9 x 13.8 x 11.3 in.)



128

2313Laser Light Pointer For slide and film presentations, overhead

and data projecting, screen presentationsand non-contact pointing in research, medicine and industry. Sturdy black all-metalpen-shape housing.Length: approx. 145 mm (5.7 in.)

The bright light dot is clearly visible in day-light. Safety Class 2.

Range approx. 300 m (330 yd.).

Batteries included (2 x 1.5 V AAA-type)

2316Laser Light Pointer For slide and film presentations, overhead

and data projecting, screen presentationsand non-contact pointing in research, medicine and industry. Sturdy black all-metalpen-shape housing.Length: approx. 140 mm (5.5 in.)

The bright light dot is clearly visible in day-light. Safety Class 2.

Range approx. 150 m (165 yd.).

Batteries included (2 x 1.5 V AAA-type)

If you are looking for a simple and low-cost way to transfer your slides to videoto include them into a video film, pleasecheck, if the Video Transfer Set onpage 158 is an appropriate solution.


07_Image + Arch 25.06.2004 11:37 Uhr Seite 129

130

After processing your films, burningimage files to a CD, enlarging or printingpictures, there is still something to do.

For example, pictures and prints have tobe trimmed. Trimmers – like thosedescribed from page 141 on – providefor clean cutting edges and perfectangles. A cutting ruler will also do agood job.

Magnifiers are indispensible for preciseinspection of pictures and films.Requirements can be extremely diffe-rent and according to that there is abroad range of magnifiers.

Marking and labelling helps to keeporder and control. Special labelling pensfor CDRs, RC papers, slide mounts andarchiving materials should always be athand.

You will find these useful little helpersand more on the following pages.

After Treatment


6395–96„Pick-it“ Post Card

For postcards with the personal touch. Youcan turn your own prints into individual gree-tings, congratulations or invitation cards, forsending on holiday, at Christmas or Easter,for birthdays and anniversaries, weddings,etc.

Adhesive transparent film on the front, underwhich photos up to 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 in.) insize can be attached. The film functions likea lamination and protects the print. Narrowborder for personal signature. Back markedwith postcard layout.

6395: Pick-it post card, 1 card6396: Pick-it post card, 3 cards

6398–99Counter Display

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 18 x 31 x 7 cm (7.1 x 12.2 x 4.1 in.)

6399: with 60 postcards packed individually6398: with 20 packs of 3 postcards each

131Image + Archiving


132

2035/39 „CD[R]pen“ Labelling Pens For smudge-proof writing on CDRs, slide

frames and plastic coated photographicpapers. Also suitable for plastic, glass, metaland other smooth surfaces. Quick-drying.

2035: black, 1 piece2039: set consisting of one each black, red,

green and blue.

6348Red-Eye-Pen Removes red eyes on color prints and sli-

des. The natural eye color and reflections arepreserved, the photo is not scratched.

Especially soft fine point for exact work.Simple use. Long lasting. Acid-free and non-toxic.

Not suitabel for Polaroid photos.

Length: approx. 14 cm (5.5 in.)

20 x 6348

6349

10 pens each of black, red, green, blue

2040

40 pensblack

2041



6362/65/67Cotton Gloves To prevent fingerprints on prints, negatives,

optical glass, etc. 100 % Cotton, washableat all temperatures.

6362: one pair, size 15 (for large hands)6365: one pair, size 12 (standard size)6367: three pairs, size 12 (standard size)

6391Print Detail Determinator For quick and exact determination of the

desired detail. The sizes are adjustable withtwo independently movable masking seg-ments, with any desired height-to-widthratio.

Maximun masking size: 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8 in.)

6689Scissors Body of fibreglass-reinforced nylon. Cutting

blades of specially heat-treated stainlesssteel, antimagnetic.

Length: approx. 18 cm (7.1 in.)

4315Cutting Ruler Cuts paper, foils and film. Transparent pres-

sure ruler with attached metal guide bar forthe cutting head. Three exchangeable cut-ting heads with rotary blade for line cutting,zigzag cutting and perforation. Pressure rulerwith cm and inch scales, format markingsand grid pattern, cutting mat with scalesline-up squares.

Cutting length: approx. 31 cm (12.2 in.)Cutting thickness: max. 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)Cutting mat: approx. 38 x 10 cm (15 x 4 in.)


2344Aspherical Magnifier High-quality magnifying loupe for profess-

ional applications. Multi-coated, high-perfor-mance optical system for superb resolutionof the finest details at maximum contrastover the entire viewing area, even out to theedges without the slightest distortions.Eyesight correction from +1.0 to -2.0 diopt-res. Exchangeable cover for reflected andtransmitted light viewing. Eye cap rolls back.Neck cord included.

Magnification: 6 xLens diam.: 46 mm (1.8 in.)Height: approx. 63 mm (2.5 in.)

2346Aspherical 6x6 Magnifier High-quality magnifying loupe for assessing

slides up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) andother originals. Multi-coated high-performan-ce optical system for superb resolution ofthe finest details at maximum contrast overthe entire viewing area, even out to theedges without the slightest distortions.Eyesight correction from +0 to -1.5 dioptres.Exchangeable cover for reflected and trans-mitted light viewing. Eye cap rolls back.Neck cord included.

Magnification: 3 xLens diam.: 36 mm (1.4 in.)Height: approx. 97 mm (3.8 in.)

2347Aspherical Magnifier High-grade magnifier for the professional vie-

wing/appraisal of slides and other originals.Resolution of finest details at high contrastover the entire field of vision. No visibledistortion even at margins. Virtually no straylight. Correction of faulty vision from -2 to+0.5 dpt. Sliding mask for transparent andopaque originals. Eye cup rolls back.Including neck cord.

Magnification: 4 xLens diameter: 28 mm (1.1 in.)Height: approx. 72 mm (2.8 in.)

134


2324-25 Precision Magnifier High-quality lens, fully colour corrected, free

of all visible aberrations. Dioptre compensati-on from +1.5 to -2.5 for individual eyesightadjustment. Exchangeable attachments(transparent and opaque ring) for transmittedand reflected light originals. Neck cord inclu-ded. Metallic-look mount.

2324: 4x magnification2325: 8x magnification

2348Precision Magnifier For precise viewing and measuring. With

colour-corrected achromatic lens. Coatedlens for razor-sharp definition. Eyesightadjustment. With 20 mm (.8 in.) measuringscale with 1/10 mm divisions (on stand sur-face of magnifier, unscrews).

Magnification: 7xLens diameter: 23 mm (.9 in.)Height: approx. 51 mm (2 in.)

2335/37Linen Tester Precision magnifier with biconvex lens made

of optically ground silicate glass. Mountmade of chrome-plated brass.

2335 2337—————————————————— Magnification: 8x 5x

Lens-ø (mm/in): 15/0.6 28/1.1

Viewing area: 20 x 20/ 30 x 30/mm/in. (.8 x .8) (1.2 x 1.2)

Height (mm/in): 33/1.3 53/2.1

Dimensions 28x10x37 40x14x53(folded down) 1.1x0.4x1.5 1.6x0.6x2.1approx. cm/in


2324

2325

2337 2335


136

2338Base Magnifier Magnifier for allround use with high-grade

aspherical lens, hard-coated, made ofimpact-proof plastic, absolutely scratch-proof. Transparent base. Large viewing field.

Magnification: 4xLens diameter: 55 mm (2.2 in.)Viewing field diam.: 62 mm (2.4 in.)Height: approx. 60 mm (2.4 in.)

2331/34Base Magnifier Magnifier for allround use. Transparent base.

2331: Openings in the base permit adjust-ment under the magnifier.Magnification: 10xLens diameter: 26 mm (1 in.)Dimensions: approx. 47 x 34 x 47 mm(WxHxD) (1.8 x 1.3 x 1.8 in.)

2334:Magnification: 8xLens diameter: 24 mm (.9 in.)Height: approx. 45 mm (1.8 in.)

2333Folding Magnifier Especially suited for quick checks and mea-

surements of flat objects. Light-weight lens.Base features 30 mm (1.2 in.) scale calibra-ted in mm.

Magnification: 5xLens diameter: 28 mm (1.1 in.)Viewing area: 30 x 30 mm (1.2 x 1.2“)Height (in use): approx. 52 mm (2 in.)Dimensions approx. 40 x 50 x 16 mm(folded down): (1.6 x 2 x .6 in.)

2323„magnoFlex“ Hand-held/DesktopMagnifier

A functionally designed magnifier that canbe used as a hand-held reading glass oras a desk-top magnifier with base for vertical or inclined viewing.Magnification: 3.5 xLens diam.: 56 mm (2.2 in.)Height: approx. 62 mm (2.4 in.)

23312334

8 x 2334

8934



2356Pop-Up Magnifier Compact magnifier with LED light. Special

mechanism provides for smooth „pop-up“ ofloupe, which remains safely in plastic hou-sing when not in use. LED light with separa-te switch is directed downwards when loupeis in viewing position and straight aheadwhen loup is inside housing. Required batte-ries: 2 x AAA (not included). Magnification:3x, viewing area: 40 x 35 mm (1.6 x 1.4 in.)Dimensions (loupe inside): 90 x 56 x 16 mm(3.5 x 2.2 x 0.6 in.)Weight (without batteries): ca. 60 g (2.1 oz.)

2355Flash-Light Magnifier Compact pocket loupe with light source.

Loupe swings out for use or is safely housedin cover. Can also be used as flash light.

Required batteries: 1 x AAA (not included)

Magnification: 5xLens-ø: 21 mm (0.8 in.)Dimensions (folded): 65 x 50 x 15 mm

(2.6 x 2 x 0.6 in.)Weight (without batteries): approx. 20 g

(0.7 oz.)

2357-59Illuminated Magnifier Large 2x loupe with integrated 4x segment.

Illumination with adjustable angle. Sturdyhousing with rubber coating. Required batteries: 2 x AA (not included)

2357 2358 2359

Lens-ø (mm/in) 62/2.4 75/3 86/3.4

Length (mm/in) 156/6.1 197/7.8 215/8.5

Weight (g/oz) 68/2.4 104/3.7 133/4.7

2339Pocket Microscope 30 x magnification. With focussing mecha-

nism and illumination of viewing field.

Required batteries: 2 x AA (not included)

Dimensions: approx. 140 x 39 x 22 mm(WxHxD): (5.5 x 1.5 x .9 in.)

2336Replacement Lamp For pocket microscope 2339.

2.5 V, E 10. Lens form.

3 x 23573 x 23583 x 2359

2360


Negative Filing Sheets

For the orderly and protected storage andarchiving of negative strips and single negati-ves. Including cover sheet with index. Marginpunched with Euro-holes. Different materialversions:

- top and bottom sides made of milky whiteglassine

- top side transparent acetate, bottom sidepaper

- top and bottom sides acetate, so especial-ly suitable for producing contact printsbecause the film can be left in the sleeve.

Negative Filing Sheets for 35 mm film

For 42 35mm negatives: 7 strips each 6negatives. Dimensions: approx. 260 x 310cm (10.2 x 12.2 in.)

2510: Glassine 100 sheets2515: Glassine 25 sheets2520: Acetate/Paper 100 sheets2530: Acetate 100 sheets2535: Acetate 25 sheets

For 42 35mm negatives. 7 strips each 6negatives. With tear-off memo sheet.Dimensions: approx. 260 x 310 mm (10.2 x12.2 in.)

2511: Glassine 100 sheets2521: Acetate/Paper 100 sheets

For 40 35mm negatives. 10 strips each 4 negatives. Dimensions: approx. 260 x 315 mm (10.2 x 12.4 in.)

2513: Glassine 100 sheets2518: Glassine 25 sheets

The following negative filing sheets for60 mm film are ideal for 35 mm negati-ves with re-order strips.

138


Negative Filing Sheets for 60 mm film

For 4 negative strips to hold:

4,5 x 6 cm: 16 negatives6 x 6 cm: 12 negatives6 x 7 cm: 12 negatives6 x 8 cm: 8 negatives6 x 9 cm: 8 negatives

35 mm negatives with re-order strips: max.24 negatives (4 strips with up to 6 negatives)

Dimensions: approx. 260 x 310 mm (10.2 x 12.2 in.)

2610: Glassine 100 sheets2615: Glassine 25 sheets2620: Acetate/Paper 100 sheets2630: Acetate 100 sheets2635: Acetate 25 sheets

Negative Filing Sheets for 9 x 12 cm (4 x 5") negatives

For 4 negatives. With tear-off paper bottomsheet. Dimensions: approx. 260 x 315 mm(10.2 x 12.4 in.)

2710: Glassine 100 sheets

Negative Filing Sheets for 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7") negatives

For 2 negatives. Dimensions: approx. 260 x 310 mm (10.2 x 12.2 in.)

2725: Glassine 25 sheets


25112521

2510/152520 2530/35

2610/152620 2630/35

27252710

2513/18

24x36

24x3

6

4x5" 13x18

9x12

24x36

4,5x6

6x6

6x9

24x36


140

Transparent Slide SleevesFor orderly and safe storing and filing of fra-med slides. Plasticizer-free PP film withoutchemical effect on the slides. Margin pun-ched with Euro-holes. Dimensions: approx.250 x 315 mm (9.8 x 12.4 in.)

For 20 35mm slides in 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2“) frames

2570: Upper and lower side transparent.Extra-thin foil. 25 sheets.

2580: Upper and lower side transparent. 10 sheets.

2590: Upper side transparent, lower sidemilkwhite. 10 sheets.

For 12 6 x 6 slides in 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8“)frames


For 6 6 x 7 slides in 8,5 x 8,5 cm (3.3 x 3.3“)frames


2500/2516Filing Binder 4-ring binder for Kaiser negative filing sheets

and transparent slide sleeves.Dimensions approx. 300 x 320 mm(WxH): (11.8 x 12.6 in.)Back: approx. 60 mm (2.4 in.)

2500: Filing binder, empty2516: Filing binder, complete with 25 negati-ve filing sheets of glassine for 35 mm-filmand blank for table of contents.

257025802590

2690

2790


08_Timmers 25.06.2004 11:39 Uhr Seite 141

142

According tothe dictionary „cutting edge“ means„the edge of a cutting tool in contactwith the work during a machining ope-ration“. And that’s the definition we willuse. But for „cutting edge“ you mightalso find explanations like „up-to-date“or „state-of-the-art“ or „leading positi-on“, and here we are right again.

Those who „do“ pictures themselves,either in a photo lab or with an ink jetprinter, need a trimmer.When you con-sider, what can be „produced“ withyour computer using up-to-date prin-

ting software – businesscards, greeting cards, CDinlays and much more – aclean and precise cut is the

minimum you should grant toyour own printout.

Trimmers using a rotary blade offer alot of advantages and are especiallysafe.

Trimmers with interchangeable cuttingheads can provide different „cuttingedges“.

Cutting quality is definitely the mostimportant issue, this means a cleanand accurate cutting edge. Blade,counter-blade and the guiding of thecutting head are the crucial factors.Additional features like format mar-kings, scales, grid patterns and guiderails make positioning and aligningeasy.

Cutting length, cutting capacity andtable size are the determining factorsin choosing the best trimmer. Whetheryou use the trimmer as a professionaltool or just with your hobby: in anycase you can find a suitable trimmeron the following pages – so trim upyour prints.

Cutting Edge


4315Cutting Ruler

Cuts paper, foils and film. Transparent pres-sure ruler with attached metal guide bar forthe cutting head. Three exchangeable cut-ting heads with rotary blade for line cutting,zigzag cutting and perforation. Pressure rulerwith cm and inch scales, format markingsand grid pattern, cutting mat with scales andline-up squares.

Cutting length: approx. 31 cm (12.2 in.)Cutting thickness: max. 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)Cutting mat: approx. 38 x 10 cm (15 x 4 in.)

143Trimmers

4302„micro cut“ Trimmer

Sub-compact trimmer for small format worklike passport photographs, business cardsetc. Rotating circular blade made of stainlesssteel in a closed plastic housing. Automaticpaper clamping at cutting position.Transparent pressure strip. Base plate surfa-ce with cm scale and format markings.

Cutting length: approx. 15 cm (5.9 in.)Cutting thickness: max. 0,5 mm (0.02 in.)Dimensions approx. 24 x 5.5 x 13 cm(WxHxD): (9.4 x 2.2 x 5.1 in.)


4304/4308-11Safety Trimmer

With self-sharpening rotating circular blade ina closed plastic housing. Automatic paperclamping for precision cutting. Transparentclamping bar. Two angle guides with cm/inchscale. Baseboard with cm/inch scale, angleand format markings.

4304: mini cutCutting length: approx. 250 mm (9.8 in.)Cutting thickness: approx. 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 36 x 7 x 21 cm (14.2 x 2.8 x 8.3 in.)

4308: hobby cut 1Cutting length: approx. 320 mm (12.6 in.)Cutting thickness: approx. 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 43 x 7 x 21 cm (16.9 x 2.8 x 8.3 in.)

4309: hobby cut 2Cutting length: approx. 460 mm (18.1 in.)Cutting thickness: approx. 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 57 x 7 x 21 cm (22.4 x 2.8 x 8.3 in.)

4310: hobby cut 1 same as 4308, but with additionalcutting head for deckle cut

4311: hobby cut 1 same as 4308, but with additionalcutting heads for deckle cut, perforati-on and zig-zag cut.

4312 Cutting Heads Set

Comprises three cutting heads for perforati-on, deckle and zig-zag cut and a specialcutting bar. The cutting heads can be repla-ced with the regular cutting head of thehobby cut 1 (4308, manufactured 9/01 orlater).

144

4304

4308

4309

4312


4317-19„profi cut“ Safety Trimmer

Self-sharpening circular blade in closed pla-stic housing. Grinded counter-blade.Automatic paper clamping at cutting positi-on. Transparent paper-holding strip. Anglestop with cm and inch scales and detacha-ble magnetic back stop. Base plate with cmand inch scales and format markings.Provisions for wall mounting.

4317: profi cut 1Cutting length: 360 mm (14.2 in.)Cutting thickness: 2 mm (.08 in.)Dimensions 555 x 92 x 367 mm(WxHxD): (21.8 x 3.6 x 14.4 in.)

4318: profi cut 2Cutting length: 510 mm (20.1 in)Cuttung thickness: 2 mm (.08 in.)Dimensions 705 x 92 x 367 mm(WxHxD): (27.8 x 3.6 x 14.4 in.)

4319: profi cut 3Cutting length: 720 mm (28.3 in.)Cutting thickness: 2 mm (.08 in.)Dimensions 915 x 92 x 367 mm(WxHxD): (36 x 3.6 x 14.4 in.)

145Trimmers


4102-03„multi cut“ Safety Trimmer

Guillotine-type trimmer with honed top andbottom blades. Hand pressing rail. Angleguide with cm/inch scale and detachablemagnetic back stop.

Sturdy baseboard with cm/inch scale and format markings.

4102: multi cut 1Cutting length: 330 mm (13 in.)Cutting thickness: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)Baseboard size: 33 x 16.5 cm

(13 x 6.5 in.)Dimensions 42 x 28 cm (WxHxD): (16.5 x 11 in.)

4103: multi cut 2Cutting length: 460 mm (18.1 in.)Cutting thickness: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)Baseboard size: 46 x 16.5 cm

(18.1 x 6.5 in.)Dimensions 55 x 28 cm (WxHxD): (21.7 x 11 in.)

146


09_Video Lights 25.06.2004 11:42 Uhr Seite 147

148

Much has been written and publishedabout the significance of light and

illumination for video recording. Itis beyond dispute that modern

camcorders can provide quiteuseful results even in lowlight levels. It is also beyonddispute that high-qualityshots can only be achievedwith high-quality lighting.Brilliant colors and greatdepth of field demands a lot

of light, and if you want touse light as a pictorial tool

you will often need more thanone light source. A videolight

should be ready, when there isnot enough available light orwhen - for example - faces of per-sons are too dark in backlightsituations.

The light should be as small as possi-ble – camcorders are also becomingsmaller and smaller –, it should haveits own power supply to keep youmobile and it should provide as muchlight as possible for the longest possi-ble time. So far it is (still) not possibleto fulfill all these wishes at the sametime. Long operating times will ask forlarge and heavy batteries, because thesmall high-performance halogen lampshave a rather high power consumption.

Great technical improvements withLED lamps (light-emitting diodes) havereduced some of the present limitati-ons, and the „digiNova“ is one of thefirst video lights with this technologygetting closer to the ideals mentionedabove. Small dimensions and almosttwo hours of continuous operation withregular batteries or rechargeables arereally progress.

If you need more light output and awider range, you have to use halogenlamps, either with a battery-operatedcamcorder light or with an AC-operatedvideolight placed on a stand for profes-sional lighting and composing jobs.

Bright Moments


3282„digiNova“ LED Video Light

Super compact camcorder light using LEDtechnology.

White high-performance LED combined withfacetted reflector and cylinder diffusor foreven light distribution. Light intensity compa-rable to 8 watt halogen light.

Powered by four regular AAA-batteries orrechargeable NiMH batteries.

Accessory shoe with blocking screw.

Specifications:Oprating voltage: 4,8 - 6 VColor temperature: approx. 5.500 KelvinOperating time with setof batteries/charge: up to 2 hoursLED service life: up to 200,000 hrsWeight (w/o batteries): 60 g (2.1 oz.) Dimensions (WxHxD): 47 x 80 x 57 mm

(1.9 x 3.1 x 2.2 in.) Supplied without batteries.

149Video Lights


93396-97 „camlight TOP 35“ Videolight

Compact camcorder light with 35 W, 3200 Khalogen lamp. For use with Kaiser PP TOP(1.1 Ah) batteries, Sony NP 55/77,Panasonic VW-CBS 2 and 6 V camcorderbatteries from JVC, Hitachi or other similarmakes; Canon BP-E722 and BP-E77KE batteries can be used with an extra adapter(accessory). Operating time with fully char-ged PP TOP battery approx. 12 minutes,with other batteries up to 25 minutes depen-ding on battery capacity. State of chargedisplayed with three LEDs. Light tilts for-wards by 25°. 1/4“ tripod thread. Socket formains adapter.

93396: camlight TOP 35 without battery93397: camlight TOP 35 with PP TOP bat-

tery and charger

Specifications:Operating voltage: 6 VWeight (w/o battery): approx. 165 g (5.8 oz.)Dimensions approx. 60 x 115 x 72 mm (WxHxD): (2.4 x 4.5 x 2.8 in.)

(w/o battery)

93389Mains Adapter

Enables the camlight TOP 35 to be run forunlimited time from the mains. 4 m (13 ft.)long connecting cable with plug-in transfor-mer.

93399Adapter for Canon Batteries

To fit Canon-type BP-E 722 and BP-E 77 KEbatteries to all camlight TOP videolights.

150

3008

93399


93320 „camlight 250“ Videolight250 watt safety light with service-free recharge-able battery in carrying case. Front attachmentwith four light flaps and diffuser. Angle of lightemersion steplessly variable from 35° to 55°.Heat-resistant reflector housing. Mounting pos-sible in two ways: either flat on housing - withthe light tiltable by 25° - or raised on the pivo-ting bracket. In this position the light can be til-ted upwards and downwards by a total of 100°.Stand thread 1/4 “. On/off switch. Running timeapprox. 20 min at full charge. Charging timemax. 14 hours. Including charger.

Halogen lamp: 24 V, 250 W, 3200 KCord: spiral cable, max. 1.6 m (5 ft. 3 in.)Battery capacity: 6.5 AhWeights: light approx. 600 g (1 Ibs. 5 oz.)

battery bag approx. 6 kg(13 Ibs. 4 oz.)Dimensions: light approx.66x145 (100) x125 mm

(2.6 x 5.7 [3.9] x 4.9 in.)battery bag approx. 240 x 210 x 120 mm (9.4 x 8.3 x 4.7 in.)

93391 Conversion FilterComplete front attachment with light flaps andconversion filter for 93320 and 93392.

151Video Lights

93302„camlight TOP 20 basic“ Videolight

Compact camcorder light with 35 W, 3200 Khalogen lamp. For use with Kaiser PP TOP (1.1Ah) batteries, Sony NP 55/77, Panasonic VW-CBS 2 and 6 V camcorder batteries from JVC,Hitachi or other similar makes; Canon BP-E722and BP-E77KE batteries can be used with anextra adapter (accessory). Operating time 38minutes. Light tilts forwards by 25°. 1/4“ tripodthread. Socket for mains adapter.

Operating voltage: 6 VWeight: approx. 160 g (5.6 oz.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 60 x115 x 72 mm

(2.4 x 4.5 x 2.8 in.)Supplied without battery.

93398 PP TOP BatteryRechargeable battery for camlight TOP 35(93396-97, camlight TOP 20 basic (93302) andformer camlight TOP units. Operating voltage: 6V, Capacity: 1,1 Ah, Weight: 200 g (7 oz.)

93343 Chargerfor PP TOP (93398) battery and other camlightTOP units equipped with this battery. 3027

3036


93310„camlight 100“ Videolight

Compact safety lighting unit for battery ope-ration. Front attachment with light flaps andsafety glass. Heat-resistant reflector housingcan be swivelled up to 90° upwards for indi-rect lighting. Adjustable angle of light escape(variable focussing). Accessory shoe formounting to camera. 1/4 “ tripod thread.On/off switch. Power pack with lamp holderand maintenance-free lead acid battery.Operating time approx. 25 min. under fullload. Can also be operated with 50 W lampfor approx. 50 min. Battery charge indicator(LED). Charging time max. 14 hours depen-ding on degree of discharge. Complete withcharger.

Technical specifications of lamp:Operating voltage: 12 VHalogen lamp: 100 W, 3200 KCord: spiral cord, max 1.5 m (5 ft.)Weight: approx. 425 g (15 oz.)Dimensions: approx. 60 x 120 x 90 mm(WxHxD) (2.4 x 4.7 x 3.5 in.)

Technical specifications of battery:Rated capacity: 6.5 Ah/7 AhWeight: approx. 3030 g (6 1/2 Ibs.)Dimensions: approx. 175 x 150 x 71 mm(WxHxD) (6.9 x 5.9 x 2.8 in.)

93339„camlight 100“ Videolight

With 100 watt, 3200 Kelvin halogen lamp. For 12 V battery operation. Cable with XLRconnector. Supplied without batterie.

93313 PP 100 Power Pack

12 V/6.5 Ah lead acid battery for „camlight100“. Also suitable for other 12 V units withXLR connector.

93314 Charger

For PP 100 Power Pack.

93324 Conversion FilterSafety front attachment with conversion filterfor „camlight 100“ (93310/93339).

152

93324

3028

3054


153Video Lights

93392„videolight 150“ Videolight 150 W safety light for mains operation.

Unlimited continuous operation without extracooling. Four light flaps. Variable mountingpossibilities. Can be used on camcorder orstand.

For detailed description see page 33.

93307-08„videolight 8“ Videolight 300 W safety light for mains operation.

Unlimited continuous operation without extracooling. Light tilts upwards for indirectlighting. Handle with accessory shoe and tri-pod thread.

93307: with four light flaps93308: without lightflaps


3047Portable Lighting Kit 300 W „videolight 8 S“ with four light flaps,

black light-metal light stand with maximumheight of 2.2 m (7.2 ft.), joint with umbrellamount, holding rod and white studio umbrel-la, 37 cm (14.5 in.) diameter, in carrying bagwith handle and adjustable shoulder strap

Length of bag: approx. 82 cm (33 in.)

93356 „Mini“ Portable Lighting Kit Consisting of 300 W video light “videolight 8

S“ (93307), clamp (1512), reflector/shoot-through lighting umbrella (1522) and moun-ting rod (1520) in sturdy carrying case.Dimensions: approx. 385 x 265 x 100 mm

(15.2 x 10.4 x 3.9 in.)

3058

3038

3058

3038

3058

3038

3003


154


Low-noise blower cooling for unlimited conti-nuous operation. Four barn doors. Lamphead and handle can be tilted. Two moun-ting possibilities.



Low-noise blower cooling for unlimited conti-nuous operation. Four barn doors. Lampscan be switched individually. Additionalswitch for modelling light. Lamp head andhandle can be tilted. Two mounting possibili-ties.


93375„studiolight 1000“Safety Lighting Unit

1000 W safety light for mains operation.Low-noise blower cooling. Rotatable four-flap gate. Receiving slot for safety screen orfilter. Variable focussing. Can be switched tomodelling light. Mounting bracket pivots forstanding or hanging attachment. Light tiltsand can be locked in any position. For detailed description see page 31.

3061„studiolight 2000“Safety Lighting Unit

1000 W safety light for mains operation.Low-noise blower cooling. Four barn doors.Two receiving slot for safety screen and filter.Lamps can be switched individually and tomodelling light. Mounting bracket pivots forstanding or hanging attachment. Light tiltsand can be locked in any position. For detailed description see page 30.

3075

3094

3075

3094

3075

3094

3075

3094


155Video Lights

3049Portable Lighting Kit Blower-cooled „videolight 6“ 1000 W safety

light with four barn doors, black light-metallight stand with maximum height of 2.2 m(7.2 ft.), joint with umbrella mount, holdingrod and white studio umbrella, 90 cm (35.4 in.)diameter, in carrying bag with handle andadjustable shoulder strap

Length of bag: approx. 82 cm (33 in.)

93359 „studio“ Portable Lighting Kit Complete lighting kit in strong case for easy

access and safe carrying. Contains two “stu-diolight 1000“ lights (1000 W), two 5041joints , two 5031 light stands, one studioumbrella and one 3084 holding bracket.

Dimensions of case: approx. 505 x 355 x160 mm (20 x 14 x 6.3 in.)

Light StandsStands made of polished aluminum tubewith air-cushion center column.

3402: 72 - 210 cm, bis max. 3 kg(28 - 83 in., max. load 6.6 lbs.)


3404: 101 - 325 cm, bis max. 10 kg(40 - 128 in., max. load 22 lbs.)


Stands made of black anodized light-metal.

5031: 52 - 220 cm, bis max. 1,5 kg(20 - 86 in., max. load 3.3 lbs.)


5035: 104 - 290 cm, bis max. 10 kg(41 - 114 in., max. load 22 lbs.)


3075

3094

3075

3094


93296Accessory Bracket For raised mounting of a light, microphone

etc. next to the camcorder lens. Folding.With antitwist pin for exact right-angledmounting on camcorder. Widened three-point rest on bottom side. Camera withmounted bracket stands firmly on all flat sur-faces.

A 1/4 tripod threat.

93378Twin Bracket For mounting two lights, light and micropho-

ne etc. on the camcorder or on stands.Bracket with pivot stay and two accessoryshoes. For raised fitting to camcorders withawkwardly placed accessory show.

Width: approx. 130 mm (5.1 in.)Height: approx. 102 mm (4 in.)Tripod threat: A 1/4.

93381Accessory Adapter For mounting a light, microphone, monitor

etc. on camcorders without accessoryshoes. Suitable for 6 V powered Sony,Panasonic, JVC, Hitachi, Sharp and similarcamcorders. The adapter is mounted bet-ween camcorder and battery .

Can also be used as an adapter for non-system 6 V batteries. Sliding and detachableshoe.

156


96008Video Shoulder Pod Combined chest and shoulder pod for cam-

corders. Pivoting mounting plate with 1/4”thread, securing pin and non-slip face.Length steplessly adjustable and lockable inany position.

Folded flat the pod can stay fitted to thecamcorder. Adjustable strap.

96009Counter Display With four 96008 Video Shoulder Pods in

individual packaging.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 21.5 x 37.5 x19.5 cm (8.5 x 14.8 x 7.7 in.)

93334Charger For camcorder rechargeable batteries, Sony

Type NP 55/77 or similar makes, e.g madeby Fuji, Ricoh, Sanyo, Nikon etc.

Charging time depending on battery capacityapprox. 8 to 12 hours. Cord 4 m (13 ft.1 in.).

157Video Lights


96653 Video-TransferFor copying cinefilms (8 mm, 16 mm) andslides on to video. Backprojection screenwith fine-grained 100 x 75 mm (3.9 x 3.0 in.)viewing screen. Built-in reversing mirror fortrue-sided image. Integrated close-up lenswith 55 mm (2.2 in.) diameter. Strong tablebase with adjustable feet and spirit level onbase. Stepless height adjustment.Dimensions (BxHxD) approx. 230 x 190(230) x 142 mm (9.1 x 7.5 (9.1) x 5.6 in.)

96655 Video Transfer SetConsisting of the video transfer unit 96653,table stand 96654 for the camcorder, filteradapter 96656 for projection lenses from 25to 62 mm (1 to 2.4 in.) diameter and close-up lens 2 (14249).

96654Table StandStrong table stand with 1/4” mounting thread.For stable positioning of camcorders, parti-cularly when combined with the video trans-fer unit 96653. Table base with adjustablefeet and spirit level in base. Stepless heightadjustment from 96 to 136 mm (3.8 x 5.4 in.)Dimensions (BxHxD) approx. 182 x 101(141) x 117 mm (7.2 x 4 (5.6) x 4.6 in.)

96656Filter AdapterFor fastening filters and close-up lenses with49 mm diameter to projection lenses. The fil-ter adapter is simply pressed on. It automati-cally adapts to lens diameters from 25 mmto 62 mm (1 to 2.4 in.). Only suitable for len-ses that project out of the projector casingwhen in use.

96657Filter Adapter SetConsisting of 96656 filter adapter and 14249close-up lens. Used in conjunction with thevideo transfer unit (e.g. Art. No. 96653) tocopy slides onto video when the slide pro-jector does not focus down to shortdistances and does not have a filter mountfor close-up lenses.

158

966579665496653


10_Camera Accesso 25.06.2004 16:06 Uhr Seite 159

160

Are accessories really needed withcameras, that can do everything, andeven do this fully automatically? Theanswer is „No“, when we talk aboutcandid shots, about snapping a memo-rable occasion or scene. As soon asyou start taking more complicated pic-tures you will find, that – from time totime – you could have used somethingto help you to make shooting easier orto achieve a particular result.

For example with the small displays onthe back of digital cameras: it is prettydifficult to see the image when there issunlight from the back or from the side.That is why a monitor shield should be

part of your basic digital camera equip-ment. But you will only use such anaccessory, if it does not make yourcamera bulky, if it folds down when youdo not need it, if it can be kept atta-ched to your camera and if it will fitmany different cameras – in one word:it must be convenient.

In these days many cameras – analogand digital – have a built-in flash gun.But that can not always do the job, itdoes not have enough power or cover-age. If you can connect an externalflash gun, you might need a flashbracket, a bounce flash shoe or a flashadapter.

A small tripod should always be athand, because there are enough occa-sions to use it: when you use longerexposure times or the self-timer, atable-top or a clamp-on tripod is indi-

spensible. It can be a steadycompanion, because it islight-weight and compact.

Accessories - Who in the World WouldNeed That?


161161Camera Accessories

But if a more „weightily“ camera has tobe mounted on a tripod, then you willneed a ball head. It sets the camera toany desired position and holds it firmly.Depending on the weight of the came-ra/lens combination you will find diffe-rent sizes of ball heads designed fordifferent loads.

If a tripod is used, you will most proba-bly connect a cable release in ordernot to shake the camera when youpress the release button. There is alsoa clever adapter in case your cameralacks a connection for a cable release.

Filters are and will remain the mostimportant camera accessory no matterif you shoot digital or analog. Despitethe possibilities of image processingsoftware – not any digital photographerwill use one – there is one thing forsure: the quality of the initial shotshould be as good as possible.

Looking back at our question, now thewheel comes to full circle: Without qua-lity you can not capture fantastic pictu-res, at least not with reasonable effort.If – with respect to your photgraphs oryour photographic activities – specificquality issues are important for you,you can surely not do without the pro-per accessory.


162

6072-73„digiShield“ Digital Camera MonitorGlare Shield

Shields lateral and angular incidence of lightfrom the LCD monitor and improves the visi-bility of the monitor image on digital came-ras. Fits many different digital cameras.

Folds down completely and serves also as acover and a screen protector. Locks whenfolded. Coil spring supported side flaps willkeep the glare shield in opened position. Theshield is attached to the tripod socket,fastening screw with 1/4“ thread and socket.

Regardless of the position of the tripodsocket on the camera the glare shield canbe attached so that it is positioned properlyon the monitor and fits tightly to the camerabody.

6072: for monitors up to 1.5“6073: for monitors up to 1.8“



1000Flash Bracket Light metal bracket with resilient contact sur-

face. Mounting screw with 1/4“ thread andtripod bush.

Length: 16.5 cm (6.5 in.),Width: 2.8 cm (1.1 in.)

1100Angle Bracket Collapsible. Grip with hand strap. Hinged

camera bracket of light metal with resilientcontact surface.Mounting screw with 1/4“ thread and tripodbush.

Length: approx. 14 cm (5.5 in.)Width: approx. 2.8 cm (1.1 in.)Height of grip: approx. 13.5 cm (5.3 in.)

1107Angle Bracket Collapsible. Hinged camera bracket of light

metal with resilient contact surface. Slot-onfoot for flash units.widened three-point rest on bottom side.Camera with mounted bracket stands firmlyon flat surfaces.Mounting screw with 1/4“ thread and tripodbush.

Length: approx. 16.2 cm 6.4 in.)Width: approx. 6.5 cm 2.6 in.)Height of grip: approx. 15.1 cm 5.9 in.)

1501Remote Flash Trigger Electronic flash trigger for lag-free firing of a

second flash unit. No cord required. With hotflash contact. Range: 20 m (66 ft.), depen-ding on the guide number of the flash unit inuse and the brightness of the surroundings.

With 1/4“ tripod bush



164

1201Bounce Flash Shoe For indirect flashing. With ball-and-socket

joint for stepless movement in all directions.Accessory shoe detachable. 1/4” mountingthread with lock nut. Reflector umbrella hol-der 9.2 mm diameter. For fastening toaccessory shoe or stands. Stand thread 1/4”with removed slot-on foot 3/8”.


1205Bounce Flash Shoe For indirect flashing. Steplessly adjustable.

With synchro cable and flash shoe.Designed for cameras with and without hotflash shoe.

Height: approx. 47 mm (1.9 in.)Cable: approx. 30 cm (1 ft.) long

1200Bounce Flash Shoe For indirect flash illmuniation. Steplessly

adjustable. With 1/4” tripod bush. Fits intoaccessory shoe or tripods.


1300Flash Shoe Adapter For cameras with hot flash shoe and flash

equipment without hot flash shoe. With syn-chro flash socket.

Height: 16 mm (0.6 in.)

1301Flash Shoe Adapter For cameras without hot flash contact and

flash equipment with hot flash contact. Withapprox. 30 cm (11.8 in.) synchro cable, shoemount and 1/4” tripod bush. Also designedfor attaching flash equipment with hot flashcontact on tripods.

Height: 16 mm (0.6 in.)



1211Accessory Shoe For mounting flash guns with 1/4” thread.

With threaded pin (1/4”) and lock nut.

Height: 25 mm (1 in.)

1212Accessory Shoe With 2 screws. For individual mounting.

Height 5 mm (0.2 in.)

1311Flash Socket Nipple to Standard DIN 190003 (PC) for

connecting flash equipment.

Package of 10 pieces.

1313Flash Socket Adapter For connecting flash equipment with stan-

dard PC plugs to Leica cameras of the M1 -M3 series.

1322Triple PC Flash Outlet For simultaneous use of up to three flash

units with standard PC plugs

1326Right Angle MalePlug

With plug to DIN 19003 (PC) for self-fitting toflash cables. With soldering tags.

1327Right Angle FemalePlug

With nipple to DIN 19003 (PC) for self-fitting.With soldering tags. Is needed for instanceto lengthen a flash cable with PC plug.


166

1420-26Extension Cord For connecting flash equipment. With right-

angle plug and socket (PC).

1420: 0.5 m ( 1 ft. 8 in.) 1423: 2.0 m ( 6 ft. 10 in.)1424: 3.0 m ( 9 ft. 10 in.)1425: 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)1426: 10.0 m (32 ft. 10 in.)

1441Connecting Cord For flash equipment.

Heiland and PC plugs.Length: 50 cm (19.7 in.)

1450-51Spiral Cord For use in connecting flash equipment and

as extension cord.Length (extended): 200 cm (6 ft.7 in.)

1450: PC plug – PC socket1451: PC plug – Heiland plug

1408-09Flash Cable Professional flash connecting cable with spi-

ral coil for pull relief. Signal red, lengthapprox. 10 m (33 ft.)

1408: PC plug and jack plug ø 3.5 mm1409: PC plug and jack plug ø 6.35 mm

1450

1408


1512Flash Clamp For simple attachment of flash guns.

Removable accessory shoe on ball joint.Tiltable to all sides in infinite steps, lockablein any position. Additional connecting thread1/4“. With reflector umbrella holder ø 9.2mm. Clamp is impact-resistant plastic withnon-slip rubber studs.

Clamp span: max. 40 mm (1.6 in.)Height: approx. 90 mm (3.5 in.)

1522Flash Reflector Umbrella White, waterproof coated nylon fabric. For

use as a reflector and for shoot-throughlighting, with small lamps or flash equipment.Rods chrome or nickel-plated.

Diameter: approx. 37 cm (14.6 in.)Height: approx. 30 cm (11.8 in.)Rod-ø: 7.9 mm

1520Mounting Rod Enables attachment of a flash reflecting

umbrella in main flash direction. For use inconjunction with flash tilting head 1201, flashclamp 1512 and umbrella holder 5041.

Length: approx. 200 mm (8 in.)Reception hole for umbrella: approx. 8 mm(.3 in.)



168

6033-34Table Tripod Light-weight and compact tripod for com-

pacts and digital cameras. Ball head can belocked in any position. Camera platform with1/4“ mounting thread. Folds down flat.

Length (folded): approx.14.5 cm (5.7 in.)Height (set up): approx.10.3 cm (4.1 in.)Weight: approx. 55 g (2 oz.)

6033: silver colored6034: titanium colored

6036-37Table Tripod Light-weight and compact tripod for com-

pacts and digital cameras. Five-section tele-scopic feet. Ball head can be locked in anyposition. Camera platform with 1/4“ mountingthread. Folds down flat.

Length (folded): approx. 11 cm (4.3 in.)Max. height (set up): ca. 14 cm (5.5 in.)Weight: ca. 82 g (3 oz.)

6036: silver colored6037: titanium colored

96000Table Tripod Stable folding table tripod for camcorders,

SLR cameras, compact cameras, micropho-nes and lights. Can also be used as a gripfor compact cameras. Large pivoting cameraplatform with rubber overlay, tiltable, also forportrait format shots. Immersible anti-twistpin for camcorder. 1/4“ mounting thread.Height (set up): approx. 10 cm (3.9 in.)

Dimensions (folded): approx. 70 x 48 x 137 mm(2.8 x 1.9 x 5.4 in.)

Weight: approx. 250 g (8.8 oz.)

6031Table Tripod Small tripod with lockable ball-and-socket

head. For compact and digital cameras.Camera platform with 1/4“ mounting thread.Folds down flat.

Length (folded): approx. 14.5 cm (5.7 in.)Height (set up): approx. 10.8 cm (4.3 in.)Weight: approx. 55 g (2 oz.)

Display holds 16 pieces.

6 x 96000

96001

16 tripods

6031



5012Table-Top Tripod Extra small collapsible tripod. 1/4“ connecting

thread. Can also be used as microphonestand.

Height: approx. 60 mm (2.4 in.), foldedapprox. 100 mm (3.9 in.).

5005Pocket Tripod Clamp-on and table-top tripod with ball-and-

socket head and 1/4“ connecting thread.Screw-on clamp with 37 mm (1.5 in.) max.span. Can be used as clamp-on stand afterunscrewing feet, which may be stored in thestand’s centre tube.

Height (without feet): approx.130 mm (5.1in.)Weight: approx. 205 g (7.2 oz.)

6021Quick-Release Connector For quick mouting of camera on tripod. The

upper part ist mounted on the camera’s tri-pod bush and stays there, the lower part isattached to the tripod. 1/4“ connectingthread and tripod bush. Securing pin scre-wed in for exact positioning and to protectagainst unintentional twisting. Dimensions:approx. 50 x 80 x 27 mm (2 x 3.1 x 1.1 in.)

6013/18Ball-and-Socket Head

1/4“ connecting thread with lock nut. Handylever screw for clamping the ball. 3/8“ tripodthread with 1/4“ thread adapter.

6013 6018 Light- Medium-weight weightmodel model

Weight: approx. 45 g/1.6 oz. 110 g/3.9 oz. Height: approx. 50 mm/2“ 67 mm/2.6“Socket-ø: approx. 24 mm/1“ 30 mm/1.2“Max. load: approx. 1 kg/2.2 lbs 2 kg/4.4 lbs

6022Quick-Release Connector Plate Matches quick-release tripod connector

6021.1/4“ thread. Securing pin screwed in forexact positioning and to protect againstunintentional twisting.

6013 6018

60216022


6012 Professional Ball-and-Socket Head Professional ball-and-socket head for medi-

um format and heavy SLRs. Lever screw forclamping the ball. Adjustable friction brakefor fine setting. Rotating panorama base withfluid system, fixing screw and scale in two-degree divisions from 0° to ± 180°. Scalering also turns when base is fixed.Interchangeable camera mounting thread3/8“ / 1/4“. Tripod Thread 3/8“ with 1/4“ threadadapter.

Weight: approx. 1240 g (2 Ibs. 12 oz.)Height: approx. 145 mm (5.7 in.)Base diameter: approx. 75 mm (3 in.)Loading capacity: 10 kg (22 lbs.) max.

6011Professional Ball-and-Socket Head Professional ball-and-socket head. Lever

screw for clamping the ball. Adjustable fric-tion brake for presetting of friction. Rotatingpanorama base with fluid system, fixingscrew and scale in three-degrees divisionsform 0° to ± 180°. Interchangeable cameramounting thread 3/8“/ 1/4“. Tripod thread 3/8“with 1/4“ thread adapter.

Weight: approx. 660 g (1 Ibs. 7 oz.)Height: approx. 125 mm (4.9 in.)Base diameter: approx. 56 mm (2.2 in.)Loading capacity: 8 kg (17.6 lbs.) max.

6017Ball-and-Socket Head Medium-weight version. Lever screw for

fixing the ball. Rotating panorama base withfluid system, fixing screw and scale in five-degree divisions from 0° to ± 180°. Cameramounting thread 1/4“. Tripod thread 3/8“ with1/4“ thread adapter.

Height: approx. 100 mm (3.9 in.)Base diameter: approx. 45 mm (1.8 in.)Weight: approx. 300 g (10.6 oz.)Loading capacity: 4 kg (8.8 lbs.) max.

170



6400Assorted Screw and ThreadAdapters

Contents:3 mounting thread adapters 1/4“- 3/8“ 3 camera-case screws 1/4“ - 3/8“ 3 camera-case screws 1/4“ - 1/4“ 2 bracket screws 1/4“ - 3/8“ 8 thread adapters 3/8“ - 1/4“

6460Bracket Screws Aluminium thread stem, extruded plastic

body. ø 30 mm (1.2 in.). B 1/4“, A 3/8“. Pack of two.

6482Thread Adapters Made of nickel-plated brass.

Outer thread: B 3/8“Inner thread: A 1/4“ Pack of 25

6385Spirit Level One level each for vertical and horizontal

shooting position. With mounting shoe and1/4“ tripod bush.

Dimensions: approx. 20 x 25 x 35 mm(.8 x 1 x 1.4 in.)

6386Spirit Level Circular bubble in metal mounting, self-adhe-

sive. For permanent attachment to cameras,tripods etc. Can also be screwed on.

approx. 25 mm/1“


172

6505„Vario“ Slide Duplicator For making 1:1 slide copies and detail

copies up to 2.5:1 (stepless). Camera moun-ting via T-2 adapter (6510-19).

Length: approx. 170 mm (6.7 in.)

6510-19T-Mount Adapter Thread adapter for mounting lenses, bel-

lows, slide duplicators, focussing helicalmounts, etc. with T-mount on various 35-mm reflex cameras.6510: M 426511: K bayonet (Pentax and others)6512: Nikon6513: Minolta MF6514: Canon MF6515: Olympus6517: Yashica/Contax6518: Minolta (Autofocus)6519: Canon EOS (Autofocus)

6849-77 Lens Hood for Standard Lenses Made of flexible dull black rubber. With light

baffles. Metal mounting ring. Filter thread.

6849: 49 x 0,75 6862: 62 x 0,75 6852: 52 x 0,75 6867: 67 x 0,756855: 55 x 0,75 6872: 72 x 0,75 6858: 58 x 0,75 6877: 77 x 0,75

Dimensions in mm

6801-07 Lens Hood for Wide-Angle Lenses For wide-angle and zoom lenses from 28

mm focal length. Made of flexibel dull blackrubber. With light baffles. Metal mountingring.

6801: 49 x 0,756802: 52 x 0,756803: 55 x 0,756804: 58 x 0,756805: 62 x 0,756806: 67 x 0,756807: 72 x 0,75



6809-18Snap-On Lens Cap Reliable protection by clamp-on design for

snapping on to filter thread of lens.

6809: ø 46 mm6811: ø 49 mm6812: ø 52 mm6813: ø 55 mm6814: ø 58 mm6815: ø 62 mm6816: ø 67 mm6817: ø 72 mm6818: ø 77 mm

6900-92Lens Cap Made of flexible plastic, black.

6916: ø 16 mm6917: ø 17 mm 6945: ø 45 mm6918: ø 18 mm 6947: ø 47 mm6919: ø 19 mm 6948: ø 48 mm6920: ø 20 mm 6949: ø 49 mm6921: ø 21 mm 6950: ø 50 mm6922: ø 22 mm 6951: ø 51 mm6923: ø 23 mm 6952: ø 52 mm6924: ø 24 mm 6953: ø 53 mm6925: ø 25 mm 6954: ø 54 mm6926: ø 26 mm 6955: ø 55 mm6928: ø 28 mm 6956: ø 56 mm6929: ø 29 mm 6957: ø 57 mm6930: ø 30 mm 6958: ø 58 mm6931: ø 31 mm 6960: ø 60 mm6932: ø 32 mm 6961: ø 61 mm6933: ø 33 mm 6962: ø 62 mm6934: ø 34 mm 6964: ø 54 mm6935: ø 35 mm 6965: ø 65 mm6936: ø 36 mm 6968: ø 68 mm6937: ø 37 mm 6970: ø 70 mm6938: ø 38 mm 6972: ø 72 mm6939: ø 39 mm 6975: ø 75 mm6940: ø 40 mm 6980: ø 80 mm6941: ø 41 mm 6985: ø 85 mm6942: ø 42 mm 6990: ø 90 mm6943: ø 43 mm 6900: ø 100 mm6944: ø 44 mm 6992: ø 120 mm

6056Lens Cap Keeper Protects against loss of lens cap. A self-

adhesive plate is stuck to the lens cap andattached to the lens by an elastic cord.

Diameters are the insidedimensions of the lens cap.This corresponds with theoutside diameter of thelens (or filter) which iscovered with the lens cap.


174

6101-02Cable Release Black fabric covering.

6101: Length 25 cm (9.8 in.)6102: Length 50 cm (19.7 in.)

threaded rotating tip

6103-05Cable Release With locking screw.

Black fabric covering.

6103: Lenght 15 cm (6 in.)6104: Length 25 cm (9.8 in.)6105: Length 50 cm (19.7 in.),


6107-08Cable Release With auto-lock disc.

Black fabric coating.

6107: Length 25 cm (9.8 in.)6108: Lenght 50 cm (19.7 in.)


6119/21Cable Release Heavy-duty version with T-flange grip. Black

plastic covering. Threaded rotating tip.Length: 50 cm (19.7 in.)

6119: with locking screw6121: with auto-lock disc

6113/15-16Cable Release Metal spiral sheath with PVC covering.

Threaded rotating tip.

6113: with locking screw, 25 cm (9.8 in.)6115: with auto-lock disc, 25 cm (9.8 in.)6116: with auto-lock disc and T-flange grip,

50 cm (19.7 in.) long

6128-29Cable Release With locking screw. Metal gauze sheath with

PVC covering. With T-flange grip and threa-ded rotating tip.

6128: Length 50 cm (19.7 in.)6129: Length 100 cm 39.4 in.)

6119

6121

6113

6116

6115

6101

6102

6103, 6104

6105

6107

6108



6184Professional Cable Release Upper part with formed grip and auto-lock

disc. Interchangeable release with black pla-stic covering and threaded rotating tip.Release travel adjustable.

Length: 50 cm (19.7 in.)

6148Cable Release Adapter For connecting the standard cable release to

cameras with awkwardly placed connectingthread. L- shape.Threaded rotating tip.

6154Cable Release Adapter For the use of conventional cable releases

on cameras (e.g. auto focus or compactcameras) which have only a socket toconnect an electric release, or do not have acable release bush.

6143-44Pneumatic Remote Release 6143: With 5 m (16 1/2 ft.) long release tube

and winding reel. 15 cm (5.9 in.) longcable release with threaded rotatingtip.

6144: With 10 m (33 ft.) long release tube,which can be devided in 2 x 5 m (2 x16 1/2 ft.). 15 cm (5.9 in.) long cablerelease with threaded rotating pin.With winding reel and plastic box.

6143

6144


176

6785„Neopren“ Camera Strap Shoulder area made of flexible high-grade

neoprene, surfaced with fabric, non-slipunderside. Very comfortable. Lenght variablewith quick adjustment. For cameras withround or flat eyelets. Width approx. 38 mm(1.5 in.), length max. 120 cm (3 ft. 11 in.).

Color: black

6751Camera Strap Made of high-grade polyester webbing. With

woven-in rubber filaments on inside to pre-vent slipping. Ends of strap with quick-relea-se safety locks. Length adjustable. Forcameras with round or flat eyelets. Width:approx. 30 mm (1.2 in.) Length: approx. 110cm (3 1/2 ft.)Color: black.

6791 Professional Camera Strap Extremely hard-wearing woven strap with

widened shoulder area. Non-slip shoulderarea. Length can be adjusted on both sides.For cameras with round or flat eyelets. Widthapprox. 12/50 mm (.5/2 in.), length approx.110 cm (3 ft. 7 in.)

Color: black

6771Professional Camera Strap Highly durable woven strap with non-slip

shoulder pad on the underside. Length adjustment at both ends. For cameras withround or flat eyelets.Width: approx. 30 mm (1.2 in.) Length: approx. 100 cm (39.4 in.)

Color: black

6741„compact“ Camera Strap Neoprene shoulder strap for compact and

digital cameras. Can be comfortably wornover the shoulder or around the neck.Simple catch. Integrated loop ensures thatthe strap is connected to the camera in amatter of seconds.

Width: approx. 14 mm (0.6 in.) Length: approx. 89 cm (35 in.)Continuously variable length with slidingbuckle.

Color: black



6041Protective Cover For binoculars. Both eyepieces are covered.

With lugs for use with strap.

6032Binocular Mount For mounting binoculars on tripods.

Attachment at center focusing. 1/4“ tripodsocket. Max. span 20 mm (0.8 in.)

6501Film Protector Bag For protection of films from X-rays emitted at

airport controls. Made of paper especiallylaminated with lead foil on both sides. Alsosuitable as heat and dampness protection.Capacity: 22 35-mm or 18 rollfilms.


Notice: No guarantee when damaged by X-ray devices with particularly strong radiation.

6503Safety Film Container To prevent films up to ISO 3200/36° against

low-intensity X-rays in airport control points.Holds four 35 mm or APS films or two 60mm roll films and one 35 mm/APS film. Thecontainer can be opened from two sides. Italso protects against dust, splashing water,sunlight or other heat sources.Dimensions: 107 x 60 x 43 mm

(4.2 x 2.4 x 1.7 in.)

Notice: No guarantee when damaged by X-ray devices with particularly strong radiation.

10 x 6501

6500

10 Safety Film Containers

6503


178


in daylight. For bulk film material up to 30 m(98 ft.). With frame counter and remaining-film meter.


4124/27Film Cartridges For 35-mm film. For self-loading with bulk

film material. Clamp fastener on reel axle.

4124: metal type, 5 pcs.4127: plastic type, 5 pcs.

4128DX Labels For coding film cartridges with self-loaded

film or changing existing codings. Consistingof three sheets of adhesive labels (each with10 labels) made of special conductive foiland one sheet of insulating labels in differentsizes.

4125Film Cartridge Opener For opening 35-mm film cartridges.




4132Film Leader Retriever For extracting 35 mm film leader from car-

tridges into which the film has been wound.Plastic casing with one fixed and one slidingtongue. Simple use.

6389–90Changing Bag For working with light-sensitive material

where no darkroom is available. Made ofspecial black light-proof fabric with rubberlining. Infrared light-proof. With two handholes and light-proof zipper.

6389: approx. 68 x 76 cm (26.8 x 29.9 in.)6390: approx. 40 x 43 cm (15.7 x 16.9 in.)

6381-82Matt Spray To remove undesirable reflections on shiny

surfaces such as enamel, glass, plastic,high-gloss paint, chrome, etc. The photomatt-spray produces an even matt finish,dries quickly, adheres well and can be easily removed with water. 400 ml (13.5 floz.)can.

6381: transparent6382: black

6504Filter Container For safe and protected storage of filters up

to 62 mm (2.4 in.) in diameter. Any numberof containers can be mounted like a toweron top of one another. For neat and organi-zed storage in accessory bags, shelves, etc.

With blank label.

Dimensions: approx. 70 x 70 x 20 mm(2.8 x 2.8 x .8 in.)


180

Basically optical filters work in digitalphotography the same way as they dowith film. Used properly, they favorablyaffect the light hitting the film or thesensor to enhance the image. Digitalimage processing can not always easi-ly duplicate the filter effect.

The filter effects can be seen as a wayof image processing prior to taking apicture, and this works not only easylyand quickly, but will sometimes makeimpossible shots possible.

Neutral UV filters absorb the very shortultra-violet wavelenghts, which - especi-ally in the mountains, in high altitudesand over long stretches of water - pro-duce a misty background caused byatmospheric stray light. Digital camerashave a lower UV sensitivity, but withsome cameras the appearance of colorfringes can be reduced.

Skylight filters are slightly reddishcolored UV filters and give pictures awarm touch. Otherwise they have thesame characteristics as neutral UV fil-ters. They can also be used with digitaland analog cameras.

Important Auxiliaries: Filters



Polarizing filters can enhance a bluesky, suppress unwanted glare andimprove color saturation in general. Inaddition reflections on glass, water,shiny surfaces, e.g. on cars or on sunlitleaves, are eliminated. Polarizing filterscan also reduce very high contrastswhich can be an advantage with digitalcameras with a low dynamic range.

Linear and circular polarizing filtershave the same effects, their differencelies in camera compatibility. SLR came-ras with split-beam metering or autofo-cus will normally require a circular polari-zing filter whereas compact cameras -analog and most fo the digitals - will getalong with a linear polarizing filter. If youare not sure what to use, a circularpolarizer will keep you on the safe side.

Conversion filters are color correctionfilters, which convert light of a certaincolor temperature to another color tem-perature. Digital photography does notneed them, but films are balanced for aspecific color temperature. A KB 12 filteris used when you shoot on daylight filmunder artificial light conditions at appro-ximately 3000 Kelvin. Using an artificiallight film under daylight conditions requi-res a KR 12 filter.


182

A Neutral Density (ND) or Gray filterreduces the amount of light entering thecamera lens without affecting the colorrendition. This helps to obtain a slowershutter speed to enhance blurring ofmovement for example, or will result in alarger lens aperture thus enabling betterseparation of foreground and back-ground. With digital cameras you mayalso use a lower ISO setting to achievethis, but if that is not possible, a neutraldensity filter will be the only solution.

Close-up lenses reduce the minimumfocusing distance of any lens. With +1,+2, +3 and +4 diopters and a standardlens you will get focusing distances lessthan 100, 50, 33 or 25 cm (40, 20, 13or 10 in.). Two or more close-up lensescan be combined.



Yellow-green filters lead to a sophisti-cated rendition of green in landscapephotography. Especially mixed colorswith green will have a stronger contrasttowards pure green.

Yellow filters are also advantageousfor landscape photography, for examplewhite clouds stand out much betteragainst a blue sky. Once again greenwill contrast better. Yellow filters will alsotone down skin blemishes when shoo-ting portraits.

Orange filters provide for a lighter ren-dition of yellow and red, whereas blue ismuch darker. Landscape and architec-tural photos are richer in contrast andplasticity.

Red filters are perfect for generatingdramatic moods in landscape photogra-phy as a blue sky becomes very darkand white clouds shine brightly. An equal-ly intense contrast can be achieved inarchitectural photgraphy when shooting abright facade in front of a blue sky.

When shooting black-and white, colors areconverted to different gray tones. Modernblack-and-white films handle this very well.Filters can help to enhance particular attri-

butes or to achieve special effects. Thesefilters can not be used with digital photo-graphy.


184

Kaiser FiltersGeneral properties: Metal mount with front thread,Coated. UV filter MC (102..) and Skylight filter MC(104..) multi-coated.

Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code # Code #

ø 27 mm 10127 10227 10327 10427 - - - 15727 - - - - - - - -

ø 28 mm 10128 - 10328 - - - - 15728 - - - - - - - -

ø 30 mm 10130 10230 10330 10430 - - - 15730 - - - - - - - -

ø 30,5 mm 10131 10231 10331 10431 - - - 15731 - - - - - - - -

ø 37 mm 10137 10237 10337 10437 - - - 15737 - - 14337 - - - - -

ø 40,5 mm 10140 10240 10340 10440 - - - 15740 - - - - - - - -

ø 43 mm 10143 10243 10343 10443 - - - 15743 - - 14343 - - - - -

ø 46 mm 10146 10246 10346 10446 11746 12746 15646 15746 14146 14246 14346 14446 13246 13446 13546 13746

ø 49 mm 10149 10249 10349 10449 11749 12749 15649 15749 14149 14249 14349 14449 13249 13449 13549 13749

ø 52 mm 10152 10252 10352 10452 11752 12752 15652 15752 14152 14252 14352 14452 13252 13452 13552 13752

ø 55 mm 10155 10255 10355 10455 11755 12755 15655 15755 14155 14255 14355 14455 13255 13455 13555 13755

ø 58 mm 10158 10258 10358 10458 11758 12758 15658 15758 14158 14258 14358 14458 13258 13458 13558 13758

ø 62 mm 10162 10262 10362 10462 11762 12762 15662 15762 14162 14262 14362 14462 13262 13462 13562 13762

ø 67 mm 10167 10267 10367 10467 11767 12767 15667 15767 14167 14267 14367 14467 13267 13467 13567 13767

ø 72 mm 10172 10272 10372 10472 11772 12772 15672 15772 14172 14272 14372 14472 13272 13472 13572 13772

ø 77 mm 10177 10277 10377 10477 11777 12777 15677 15777 14177 14277 14377 14477 13277 13477 13577 13777

ø 82 mm 10182 10282 10382 10482 - 12782 15682 15782 - - - - - - - -1) corresponding Kodak filter designation

UV fi

lter

UV fi

lter M

CSk

yligh

t filte

r R 1

,5Sk

yligh

t filte

r MC

R 1,

5

Conv

ersio

n filt

er K

R 12

(85

1) )

Conv

ersio

n filt

er K

B 12

(80

B1) )

Polar

izing

filte

r (lin

ear)

Polar

izing

filte

r (cir

cular

)

Clos

e-up

lens

1Cl

ose-

up le

ns 2

Clos

e-up

lens

3Cl

ose-

up le

ns 4

Yello

w fi

lter (

81) )

Yello

w-g

reen

filte

r (11

1) )

Ora

nge

filter

(16

1) )Re

d filt

er (2

51) )



Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no.

ø 27 mm 16127 16227 16327 - 16527 15827 16627 15927 16727 16827 16027

ø 30,5 mm 16131 16231 16331 - 16531 15831 16631 15931 16731 16831 16031

ø 37 mm 16137 16237 16337 - 16537 15837 16637 15937 16737 16837 16037

ø 39 mm 16139 16239 16339 - 16539 15839 16639 15939 16739 16839 16039

ø 40,5 mm 16140 16240 16340 - 16540 15840 16640 15940 16740 16840 16040

ø 43 mm 16143 16243 16343 - 16543 15843 16643 15943 16743 16843 16043

ø 46 mm 16146 16246 16346 - 16546 15846 16646 15946 16746 16846 16046

ø 49 mm 16149 16249 16349 16449 16549 15849 16649 15949 16749 16849 16049

ø 52 mm 16152 16252 16352 16452 16552 15852 16652 15952 16752 16852 16052

ø 55 mm 16155 16255 16355 16455 16555 15855 16655 15955 16755 16855 16055

ø 58 mm 16158 16258 16358 16458 16558 15858 16658 15958 16758 16858 16058

ø 60 mm 16160 16260 16360 16460 16560 15860 16660 15960 16760 16860 16060

ø 62 mm 16162 16262 16362 16462 16562 15862 16662 15962 16762 16862 16062

ø 67 mm 16167 16267 16367 16467 16567 15867 16667 15967 16767 16867 16067

ø 72 mm 16172 16272 16372 16472 16572 15872 16672 15972 16772 16872 16072

ø 77 mm 16177 16277 16377 16477 16577 15877 16677 15977 16777 16877 16077

ø 82 mm 16182 16282 16382 16482 16582 15882 16682 15982 16782 16882 16082

ø 86 mm 16186 16286 16386 16486 16586 15886 16686 15986 16786 16886 16086

ø 95 mm 16195 16295 - 16495 16595 15895 16695 15995 16795 16895 16095

ø 100 mm 16196 16296 - 16496 16596 15896 16696 15996 16796 16896 16096

ø 105 mm 16197 16297 - 16497 16597 15897 16697 15997 16797 16897 16097

ø 112 mm 16198 16298 - 16498 16598 15898 16698 15998 16798 16898 16098

ø 127 mm 16199 16299 - 16499 16599 15899 16699 15999 16799 16899 16099

Rodenstock Professional FiltersGeneral properties: Slimline metal mount with front thread (except circularpolarizing filter), hard-coated, Schott-glass.

UV fi

lter

Skyli

ght f

ilter

Polar

izing

filte

r

(circ

ular

)ND

filte

r (ND

x 4)

Yello

w fi

lter

med

ium

Yello

w filte

r dar

kYe

llow

-gre

en fi

lter

Gre

en fi

lter

Ora

nge

filter

Red

filter

light

Red

filter

dar

k


186

6542-97Filter Adapter Ring For mounting filter and front attachments to

lenses with deviating mounting threads.Precision metal rings with dull black surface.

Lens thread – Filter thread

96657Filter Adapter Set Consisting of 96656 filter adapter and 14249

close-up lens.

Used for example in conjunction with thevideo transfer unit (Art. No. 96653) to copyslides onto video when the slide projectordoes not focus down to short distances anddoes not have a filter mount for close-uplenses. The filter adapter is suitable for 25-62 mm projection lenses. Only suitablefor lenses that project out of the projectorcase when in use.

6547: 27 - 37

6584: 28 - 37

6585: 30 - 37

6586: 30,5 - 37

6588: 34 - 37

6589: 37 - 436542: 37 - 466543: 37 - 496544: 37 - 52

6591: 39 - 43

6592: 40,5 - 436593: 40,5 - 466594: 40,5 - 496548: 40,5 - 52

6595: 43 - 466596: 43 - 496549: 43 - 52

6545: 46 - 496546: 46 - 526597: 46 - 55

6550: 49 - 526551: 49 - 556552: 49 - 58

6555: 52 - 496556: 52 - 556557: 52 - 586558: 52 - 62

6561: 55 - 526562: 55 - 586563: 55 - 626564: 55 - 67

6567: 58 - 556568: 58 - 626566: 58 - 67

6569: 62 - 58

6573: 67 - 58

6576: 72 - 58


11_CleaningCare 25.06.2004 11:46 Uhr Seite 187

A neat appearance is always positiveand this applies also to technical devi-ces like a camera, that very oftenaccompanies its owner to various pla-ces. Reliable, proper functioning ofphotographic equipment is even moreimportant. Especially the camera,(hopefully) being a reliable companionon holidays, at events or family cele-brations is very often exposed to theeffects of weather conditions, that canbe the cause for breakdowns of came-ra functions or of inferior picture quality,which can result in our losing docu-ments of some irretrievable occasions.

These are good reasons to give speci-al attention to the „cleaning & care“issue and to complement the cameraequipment with some important acces-sories.

Electronics are today a vital part ofeach camera, their interfaces need„good connections“, connections tomemory cards in digital cameras,connections to batteries and recharge-ables. Connections can be crucial forthe proper function of a camera, butthese interfaces are also exposed toexterior influences. Cleaning cards formemory card connectors or a contactcleaner should always be at hand,because you know from experience,that these problems do not turn upwhen you are at home.

The camera is an opticial device with„a visual function“ which is why italways needs to be „clear and clean“.Lenses and optical attachments, view-finder eyepieces, displays and monitorsshould be free from dust, dirt, fingerprints, water marks etc. Cloths, sprays,

brushes and compressed air arethe appropriate tools for the

cleaning and care of your opticalsurfaces and these should be with

you wherever you go.

Neat Appearance

188


189Cleaning + Care

6672-74Cleaning Cards For mechanical cleaning of memory card

contacts in digital cameras, MP3 players,PDAs, card readers and adapters. Removesfouling and dust and dirt particles by movingthe card back and forth several times in thecard slot. Package includes micro fibre clea-ning cloth for camera body, display etc.

6672 CompactFlash Cleaning Kit Includes one cleaning card, 10 exchangeablecleaning inserts for at least 20 cleaning proce-dures and a micro fibre cleaning cloth.

6673 Memory Stick Cleaning KitIncludes two cleaning cards eqipped with aspecial 3M cleaning tape and a micro fibrecloth. Each card can be used up to tentimes.

6674 SD-Card/MultiMedia Cleaning KitIncludes two cleaning cards with a special3M cleaning tape and a micro fibre cloth.Each card can be used up to ten times.

6662Display and Optics Cleaning Kit Includes „Display Cleaner“ pump spray and

a micro fibre cleaning cloth. Alcoholic clea-ning fluid in 25 ml (0.8 floz.) pump spraydispenser for well directed application on thearea to be cleaned and subsequent removalusing the micro fibre cloth. Leaves no residu-es. Suitable for optical and plastic glass.

6666Display and Optics Cleaning Pen Cleaning pen with conductive fibre brush on

one side and a microfibre cloth tip on theopposite side. Brush for removing dust andstatic charges. Cleaning cloth tips for wetcleaning for fingerprints and greasy spots.Cleaning liquid included. Exchangeable carri-er for large or small cloth tips. Ten tips eachare included.


190

6328Micro Fibre Cleaning Cloth Completely fluff-free, grease-absorbing cloth

for gentle, yet effective cleaning of opticallenses (glasses, lenses, magnifiers), but alsosuitable for CDs, records, photos, slides,TV/monitor screens, etc. Washable withoutloss of cleaning properties. Hemmed edges.In different colours and designs.

Size: 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in.)

6330Rodenstock Micro Fibre Cloth Completely fluff-free, grease-absorbing cloth

for gentle, yet effective cleaning of opticallenses (glasses, lenses, magnifiers), but alsosuitable for CDs, records, photos, slides,TV/monitor screens, etc. Takes up all mois-ture, oil and grime. Machine or hand wash-able without loss of cleaning properties.Colour: White, in a black pocket. Size: 17.5 x 15 cm (6.9 x 5.9 in.)

Display holding 30 cloths

6695Optical-Glass Cleaning Paper Special paper, free from silicon, for cleaning

optical glass.

Pack of 4 tolls of 30 sheets each.

6368Moist Cleaning Cloth Cleaning cloth made of felted paper, soaked

in an active cleaning agent free from silicon.For fast and thorough cleaning, handlingeven tough dirt. The cleaner dissovles grea-se, has an antistatic effect and prevents fog-ging. Suitable for coated and uncoated opti-cal glass, optical plastics, spectables, mir-rors etc.

Pack with 12 individually wrapped cloths.

6327

Assortment of 25 x 6328

6694

36 rolls ofOptical-Glass Cleaning Paper

6369

120 MoistCleaning Cloths


191Cleaning + Care

6323Contact Cleaner For cleaning oxidized and dirty battery

contacts and contact surfaces in eletric devices. Handy pencil form with twist-outfibreglass tip.

6678„Xerapol“ Plastic Polish Polish paste for removing scratches from

acrylic glasses, for example on shootingtables or light boxes. Also suitable for acrylicglass parts of cars, motorbikes, caravans,mobile homes, furniture etc. Not suitable formatt acrylic surfaces.

Tube with 50 g (1.8 oz) of polish paste

6679Acrylic Glass Cleaner Special cleaning spray for acrylic glass.

Environment-friendly. Removes fingerprints, residues of grease, felt marker and other contaminations. Streak and smear free cleaning.Anti-static effect. Bio-degradable. Pump spray bottle with 250 ml (8.5 floz.)

6364Leather Cleaning Cloth Genuine leather. For cleaning optical glass.

5 pcs.

6697Cleaning Set Consisting of optical-glass cleaning fluid,

optical-glass cleaning paper and blowerbrush.

6699Cleaning Set Consisting of lens cleaning paper, cleaning

leather and blower brush. For cameras, lenses, binoculars, spectacles etc.


192

6301Lens Brush In plastic tube. With lipstick twist mecha-

nism, not lubricated.

6311 Blower Brush Round brush with rubber blower bulb.

6314Blower Brush Flat brush with large rubber blower bulb.

6315Blower Brush Round brush with large rubber blower bulb.

6313

28 x 6311


193Cleaning + Care

6361Antistatic Cloth Lint-free, especially treated cloth.

Dimensions: approx. 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 11.8 in.)

6363Special Antistatic Cloth High-grade lint-free cloth with chainstitched

border for cleaning and antistatic treatmentof films, glass, and lenses. Also suitable forphonograph records, plastic parts and pla-stic-coated surfaces.


6362/65/67Cotton Gloves To prevent fingerprints on prints, negatives,

optical glass, etc. 100 % cotton, washableat all temperatures.

6362: One pair, size 156365: One pair, size 12 (standard size)6367: Three pairs, size 12

6317„Clear Gear“ Compressed Air For touch-free dust removal from optical, fine

mechanical and electronic equipment andcomponents. Compressed air in Aluminiummonobloc can. With spray valve and flexiblecapillary tube for inaccesible places.Environment-friendly, without CFC, harmlessfor ozone, 100 % non-flammable. No dange-rous gas/air mixture can arise. Trouble-free inoperation. Gas pressure is stable until can isempty. Will keep indefinitely.

Inhalt: 200 ml (6.8 floz.), min. 150 g (5.3 oz.)

6318

9 x 6317


6320Compressed Air Cleaner

Easy-to-use and enviroment-friendly com-pressed air cleaner with compressor, e.g. forservice workshops and labs, studios andwherever dust has to be eliminated quicklyand thoroughly. Quick-release connection forair hose. Adjustable pressure switch, displayon pressure gauge. Automatic operation:Turns on automatically when the storagetank pressure is below 4 bar and automati-cally shuts itself off when full (at 6 bar). Verylow noise level (30 dB/A at 1 m distance).Safety valve, water separator.

Motor power: 135 Watt Aspiration: 20 l/minPressure tank: 1.5 lSpiral air hose: approx. 5 m (16 ft) longWeight: approx. 17 kg (37 Ibs.)Dimensions: approx. 44 x 18 x 28 cm

(17.3 x 7.1 x 11 in.)

194


12_Bags 25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr Seite 195

196

As our tools become smal-ler, lighter and more inde-pendent, cellphones, discplayers, MP3 players, PDAsand cameras are now withus wherever we go - shop-ping, meeting with friends,in discos, at family celebrati-ons, on weekend trips andon holidays. Micro electro-nics, wireless technologyand digitization make it pos-sible.

As the camera became digtal, filmmutates to a memory card, „photogra-phic equipment“ needs less space andphoto bags must either be small ormulti-functional these days.

The cleverly designed Kaiser bagassortment is geared to this simpleinsight. Aside from the small belt bagsbeing like a protective second skin forcompacts and small digicams, theKaiser bags are all-purpose compa-nions with a „photo department“. Youwill find many small details like theseparate mobile phone bag attached tothe shoulder strap, openings for theplayer’s headphone cable, a place foryour rain jacket, inner pockets for cardsand tickets or the mash pocket for thecandy bar.

If the „photo department“ is not nee-ded, it can often be removed complete-ly and its space can be used for otherthings. Now you can understand why„slash\bag“, „EZpack“ and „disCover“ donot look like classic photo bags, and thishas other advantages as well.

And this is why the bags presented onthe following pages only are cute, con-venient and, above all, practicalaccompaniments. You would not raiseany objections to some company,wouldn’t you?

Accompaniments

12_Bags 25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr Seite 196

197Bags

8238/40„Zack micro“ Camera Bag Belt pouch made of flexible Neoprene for

subcompact cameras up to 11 x 7 x 4 cm(4.3 x 2.8 x 1.6 in.) Elastic fabric bands onboth sides allows for different camera thick-ness. Internal memory card pocket.Securing clip for camera strap. Velcro closure.

8238: black8240: silver-grey/black

8244-45 „Zack macro“ Camera Bag Belt pouch made of flexible Neoprene for

compact cameras up to 13.5 x 8.5 x 4.5 cm(5.3 x 3.3 x 1.8 in.) Elastic fabric bands onboth sides allows for different camera thick-ness. Internal memory card pocket. Securingclip for camera strap. Velcro closure.

8244: black8245: silver-grey/black

8250-51„digiTouch soft“ Camera Bag Soft pouch for subcompact cameras.

Velvety inside lining protects camera bodyand monitor. Internal memory card pocket.Large lid with Velcro closure and additionalzipper underneath. Securing clip for camerastrap. Belt clip. Black structured imitationleather.

8250: for cameras up to approx. 10.5 x 8 x3 cm (4.1 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

8251: for cameras up to approx. 12 x 8 x 3cm (4.7 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

8252-53 „digiTouch trend“ Camera Bag Rugged pouch for subcompact cameras.

Velvety inside lining protects camera bodyand monitor. Internal memory card pocket.Large lid with Velcro closure and additionalzipper underneath. Securing clip for camerastrap. Belt clip. Black nylon fabric.

8252: for cameras up to approx. 10.5 x 8 x3 cm (4.1 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

8253: for cameras up to approx. 12 x 8 x 3cm (4.7 x 3.1 x 1.2 in.)

12_Bags 25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr Seite 197

198

8803-04 „digilog 2“ Camera Bag Belt pouch/shoulder bag for digital and com-

pact cameras up to 11 x 7.5 x 4.5 cm (4.3 x3 x 1.8 in.). Internal memory card pocket.Lid with double zippers. Two elastic outsidemash pockets for accessories. Belt loop anddetachable shoulder strap, adjustable inlength.

8803: black/silver8804: black /cobalt blue

8821-22„cuBag 1“ Photo/Video Camera Bag Universal bag for smaller photo or video

equipment. Light gray inner compartmentwith variable dividers. Main lid with meshpocket underneath, opens away from user.Document pocket at the body side.Spacious front pocket with zipper, coveredby the main lid with Velcro closure. Two beltloops and detachable and adjustable shoul-der strap with shoulder rest. Grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera compartment:approx. 14 x 9 x 14 cm (5.5 x 3.5 x 5.5 in.)Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 16 x 14 x 15 cm (6.3 x 5.5 x 5.9 in.)

8821: black/silver8822: balck/cobalt blue

8823-24„cuBag 2“ Photo/Video Camera Bag Universal bag for medium sized photo or

video equipment. Light gray inner compart-ment with variable dividers. Main lid withmesh pocket underneath, opens away fromuser. Document pocket at the body side..Spacious front pocket with zipper, coveredby the main lid with Velcro closure. Two beltloops and detachable and adjustable shoul-der strap with shoulder rest. Grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera compartment:approx. 22 x 12 x 18 cm (8.7 x 4.7 x 7.1 in.)Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 23 x 17 x 19 cm (9.1 x 6.7 x 7.5 in.)

8823: black/silver8824: balck/cobalt blue

12_Bags 25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr Seite 198

8853„slash\bag“ Shoulder Bag

Multi-purpose bag with with diagonal strap.Main compartment with space for photo orvideo equipment housed in a removable traywith variable dividers and light gray innerlining. Additional space on top of the cameratray. Two zipped outside pockets and amash pocket for smaller things. Reflectivestripes. Wide shoulder strap with buckle clo-sure and shoulder pad.

Inside dimensions of camera tray: approx. 23 x 11 x 15 cm (9 x 4.3 x 9.9 in.)Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 33 x 14 x 38 cm (13 x 5.5 x 15 in.)

8854„disCover“ Shoulder Bag

Multi-purpose bag with diagonal strap. Maincompartment with space for photo or videoequipment housed in a removable tray withvariable dividers and light gray inner lining.Additional space on top of the camera tray.Additional slide-in pocket and zipped mashpocket. Opening for headphone cable of CDor MP3 player. Front side with smaller zippedpocket and spacy document pocket with lidand buckle closure. Safety belt for maincompartment. Wide shoulder strap withbuckle closure and cell phone pocket. .

Inside dimensions of camera tray: approx. 29 x 9 x 14.5 cm (11.4 x 3.5 x 5.7 in.)Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx.31 x 12 x 31 cm (12.2 x 4.7 x 12.2 in.)

199Bags

12_Bags 25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr Seite 199

8858„EZpack“ Multi-Purpose Backpack

Compact backpack made of elegant sleeknylon fabric. Main compartment with spacefor photo or video equipment housed in aremovable, padded tray with lid and variabledividers. Large mesh pocket and smallpocket for cash inside. Front pocket withorganizer trays and mesh pocket. Reflectivezipper. Adjustable shoulder strap with pad-ded rest. Grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera tray: approx. 25 x 10 x 20 cm ( 9.8 x 3.9 x 7.9 in.)Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 30 x 15 x 40 cm (11.8 x 5.9 x 15.7 in.)

8861-62Multi-Purpose Backpack

Backpack with separate compartments forcamera equipment and more. Bottom partwith variable dividers for medium sized SLRequipment. Upper part with large space foradditional things. Two separate front pocketsfor small things and documents. Reflectivezipper. Outside mesh pockets. Zippers withrain covers. Adjustable carrying system withchest and hip belt and grab handle.

Inside dimensions of camera compartment:approx. 30 x 15 x 16 cm (11.8 x 5.9 x 6.3 in.)Outside dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 33 x 20 x 43 cm (13 x 7.9 x 16.9 in.)

8861: black/silver8862: black/cobalt blue

200

12_Bags 25.06.2004 11:49 Uhr Seite 200

201201Lab

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:33 Uhr Seite 201

202

There is no doubt: The real world isanalog. We understand „analog“ as thecomplement to „digital“. Everything thatsurrounds us – light, materials, sounds– we perceive as an analog presentati-on, as a continuous, i.e. a continuous-ly changing „signal“.

The decision, whether you will makeimages of our real world as analog ordigital „signals“, that is to say shootanalog or digital pictures, is of basicfundamental importance. The sameapplies to the further processing of theanalog or digital image. Even thoughshooting digital or analog as a proce-

dure is almost the same (eventhe cameras look very simi-

lar), the home lab as theplace for analog proces-

sing is a completely dif-ferent world.

Digital processingrequires substan-

tial knowledgeabout compu-

ters and soft-ware for

proces-sing

digitalima-

ges. On the other hand working in ahome lab needs handicraft skills andrequires practical as well as specificknowledge. The enjoyment for han-dicraft work is the most important moti-vation for „making pictures“ in your ownhomelab. In some way the results ofthis work can be seen as pieces of art.Take into consideration, that the homelab worker uses the same materials asthe professional, then he could produ-ce professional results, something younormally have to spend big money for.

Working in an own home lab is alsovery often a pleasing compensation foryour professional work, nowadaysdone very often in front of a computermonitor. There are many people whodo not like to continue that in their freetime.

There are even more reasons to doyour own processing, printing andenlarging. Your home lab offers invalua-ble advantages when you make enlarg-ments bigger than 30 x 40 cm or 12 x16“. At these scales you can clearlyrecognize another property of the ana-log image recording procedure: thecontinuous tone increase from the dee-pest shadows to the brightest high-lights.

The Home Lab: Pictures of an Analog World

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 202

The pictures produced in a home labare also very durable. Especiall black-and-white pictures printed on barytapaper can reach an age of more than100 years if they are properly proces-sed and stored. Viewing these imagesrequires no additional tools, even thehuman eye is an analog sensor.

The craftsman in his home labneeds suitable and reliable tools forhis „picture workshop“. The corepiece is the enlarger, an appliancewhich does the exposure by projec-ting the film image on the photogra-phic paper. Kaiser offers a flexible

and well-engineered enlargersystem and every „image crafts-man“ can make an adequate andreasonable choice – analog afterall (Greek: „ana“ = according to +„logos“ = reason).

203203Lab

Photography: Ivana Grujic̀

Photography: Carlo Lecuit

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 203

204

The Kaiser SYSTEM-V is the consi-stant implementation of the modularconcept to an entire range of enlar-gers. It is not only characterized by theupgradability to different lighting headsand formats, all the items in the systemare compatible with all the units. Thecomplete modularisation of the enlar-

gers is the unmistakable feature ofSYSTEM-V. It also permits an enlargerto be assembled from the varioussystem modules to completely suityour individual needs. So you can get amodel out of the box or have one tai-lor-made for you as well.

•

•

•

SYSTEM-V: A Concept with a System

The hardware side of the SYSTEM-V concept is based on threeseparate assemblies.

1. The lighting components

The „heads“ determine the type of light and beam, the filtration andlight mixing features. They decide whether the complete machine isa color or black-and-white enlarger.

2. The format-determinative components

„Format“ is defined here as the maximum enlargeable negative for-mat. These components include the condensor system, the insertsfor the compound negative carrier, and the enlarger lens. They deci-de whether the machine is a 35 mm enlarger or a medium-formatone for 6 x 6 cm, 6 x 7 cm or 6 x 9 cm.

3. The dimension-determinative components

These include the baseboard and column and their dimensions –The width times the depth and column height determine the overallmachine sizes.

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 204

Negativeformat

up to

6 x

9 c

m (2

.4 x

3.5

“)up

to 6

x 7

cm

(2.4

x 2

.8“)

up to

6 x

6 c

m (2

.4 x

2.4

“)up

to 2

4 x

36 m

m (3

5 m

ill)w

all a

nd fl

oor p

roje

ctio

nsc

ale

disp

lay

heig

ht a

djus

tmen

t with

fric

tion

driv

ew

eigh

t bal

ance

with

roll

sprin

gau

tom

atic

ele

ctro

nic

focu

sing

focu

s w

ith fi

ne d

rive

max

.enl

arge

men

t (lin

ear)

on b

aseb

oard

Sche

impf

lug

rect

ifica

tion

inte

rcha

ngea

ble

mas

k/gl

ass

inse

rt to

p 2)

mas

k/gl

ass

inse

rt bo

ttom

2)

adju

stab

le m

aski

ng s

trips

colo

r hea

d w

ith d

ichr

oic

filte

rsfil

ter v

alue

s, d

ensi

tom

etric

to 1

80sc

ale

whe

els

illum

inat

edw

hite

-ligh

t lev

er/d

ensi

ty d

iaph

ragm

doub

le c

onde

nsor

filte

r dra

wer

/spi

rit le

vel

diffu

ser,

UV

filte

r;IR

filte

rre

d fil

ter

quic

k-ch

ange

lens

atta

chm

ent

filte

r hol

der

dire

ct, 7

5 w

opa

l lam

pre

flex,

100

w c

old

light

mirr

or la

mp

3)

50 x

60

cm (1

9.5

x 23

.5“)

45 x

50

cm (1

7.5

x 19

.5“)

205205Lab

VCE 7005 AFVME 7005 AFVPE 6005 AFVCP 9005VCP 7005VCP 6005VCP 3505VPM 9005VPM 7005VPM 6005VPM 3505VP 9005VP 7005VP 6005VP 3505

Aut

ofoc

usC

olor

enl

arge

rsM

ultig

rade

®B

&W

enl

arge

rs

450045054510455044804460442045604471453044264540447044654425

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

7,2

7,2

8,4

6,0

7,2

8,4

14,6

6,0

7,2

8,4

14,6

6,0

7,2

8,4

14,6

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

M

AN

AN

AN

M

AN

AN

AN

AN

P

P

P

P

M

M

M

P

M

M

M

P

M

M

M

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1)

●

●

●

●

1)

1)

1)

1)

●

1)

●

●

●

●

1)

1)

1)

1)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Type Codeno.

FocusingEnlarging

Spe

cial

s

Negativecarrier Enlarger head Lighting

Base-board

1) Multigrade head 2) AN = Anti-Newton-glass, M = mask, P = flat glass 3) Transformer required

Everything under Control

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 205

206

Color mixing headwith 100 watt halogen cold light mirrorlamp, UV and IR filter

Density aperture continuously adjustable overtwo aperture increments

Adjusting dialsfor dichroic filters up to 180

Filter drawerfor additional filter inserts 8.5 x 8.5 cm(3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Compound negative carrierremovable, with 4 adjustable masking strips, registration pins andinterchangeable format masks

Spirit levelon lens stage

Lockfor quick change of lens

Filter holder(not with all units) swings out and canbe adjusted in height, for square filtersand variable contrast filters in mounts

Spirit levelon socket

Feetindividually adjustable in height, forbest possible standing position

Outer Impressionsuch as with the VCP 7005

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

• •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

White light leverfor simultanuous swinging

out of all filters

Wall projectionfor phot-murals,

by tilting the enlarger head

Height adjustmentwith weight compensation

by roll-off spring(not with all units)

Focusingwith fine drive

(not with all units)

Distortion correctionby tilting head and lens carrier

Red filterslides in and out

Lensbig selection,

easy to mount andexactly adjustable

Columnwith scales and markings

Floor projectionfor photo-murals,

by turning the column

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 206

Color mixing head inside housingmagnesium die-cast, high mechanicalstability, good thermal conduction

Color filtersHigh quality optical dichroic inter-ference filters with subtractiveprimary colors (non-bleaching)

Filter settingvia illuminating setting wheels and swiveling levers made of light alloy.Removable by white-light lever

Mixing boxmatt-white coating, for statisticallyirregular beam distribution pattern

Diffusor platemade of neutral-color plastic,to optimize light distribution

Condensor systemdouble condensor, plano-convexlenses, optically ground

Condensor housingaluminium die-cast

Negative carriershock-resistant Makrolonwith antistatic coating

Lens stagemade of 30% glass-fibre reinforced Makrolon

Lens bellowsmade of Supronyl for high flexibilityand long time elasticity

•

•

• • •

• •

. . . and Inner Values

•

• •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

207207Lab

Roll-off springfatigue-proof high-performance roll-offspring with almost unlimited durability

IR filtermade from heat-resistant TEMPAX

®glass

Lamp12 volt/100 watt halogen cold-light

mirror lamp. Luminous flux 2700lumen. Average life time 50 hours

Outside housingtemperature-resistant Makrolon

Head mountaluminium die-cast, friction rollers

made of chromium-plated silver steel.Wear-resisting and maintenance-free.

Teflon bearings. Friction pressure adjustable.

Columnspecial aluminium tubing with

dull black anodized surface

Column basealuminium die-cast, very solid honey-comb

construction, with built-in spirit level

Baseboardhigh-compressed pressboard provides

stability and freedom from vibrations. Heightof baseboard feet adjustable individually

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 207

Color EnlargersSYSTEM-V

General specifications:

Color mixing head with dichroic interferencefilters, calibrated in densitometric values upto 180. Dials are indirectly illuminated. White-light lever for simultaneous swinging in or outof filters, with control light. Continuouslyadjustable density aperture up to 60 densito-metric densities (= two aperture settings).Best possible light distribution due to specialdiffusor plate and exchangeable double con-densor system. UV and IR filters. Filter dra-wer.

Removable compound negative carrier withinterchangeable inserts, adjustable maskingstrips, adjustable film stops and grid pins.Lens stage with spirit level and red filter, tilta-ble for distortion correction on Scheimpflugprinciple. Quick change attachment for len-ses. Height adjustment by hand-crank ope-rated friction drive on plastic bearings. Walland floor projection possible.

Wide, vibration-resistant column of embos-sed aluminium tubing, with dull black anodi-zed surface, cm and inch scales and mar-kings for enlarging scales. Matt-gray lamina-ted baseboard with individually height-adju-stable feet. Spirit level on column base.

Technical specifications:

Lamp: Halogen cold light mirror lamp, 12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35

Cord: approx. 1,80 m (6 ft.)Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35 mm

(39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)

Distance between optical axis and columnbase: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Can be converted into a copy stand or aslide duplicator.

Scope of supply: Incl. compound negativecarrier, lamp and dust hood, without lens,without transformer.

208

4550/4480

4459

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 208

4550VCP 9005

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 9cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.) and lenses up to 105 mmfocal length.

Compound negative carrier fitted with Anti-Newton glass on top and flat glass on bot-tom.

Focusing with additional fine drive. Heightadjustment with weight compensation by aroll-off spring mechanism.

Filter holder for square filters and framedMultigrade® filters, can be swung out andadjusted in height, with diffusor plate for inte-gral metering.

Baseboard (WxDxH): approx. 600 x 500 x32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)

4480VCP 7005

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.) and lenses up to 105 mmfocal length. Can be converted to a 6 x 9enlarger.

Compound negative carrier fitted with Anti-Newton glass on top and 6 x 7 format maskon bottom.




4460VCP 6005

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 6cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) and lenses up to 80mmfocal length. Can be converted to formats upto 6 x 9 cm.


Baseboard (WxDxH): approx.. 450 x 500 x28 mm (17.7 x 19.7 x 1.1 in.)

4420VCP 3505

Color enlarger for 35 film (24 x 36 mm) andlenses up to 50 mm focal length. Can beconverted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with 35 mm (24 x 36 mm) format masks.


209Lab

4460/4420

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 209

Multigrade® EnlargersSYSTEM-V


Multigrade® head with dichroic color filter foruse with variable gradation paper withoutchanging the exposure time. Scale dial indi-rectly illuminated with index numbers in halfsteps from 0 (extra soft) to 5 (extra hard) forstepless contrast control. White-light lever forsimultaneous swinging in or out of filters,with control light. Continuously adjustabledensity aperture up to 60 densitometric den-sities (= two aperture settings). Best possiblelight distribution due to special diffusor plateand exchangeable double condensorsystem. UV and IR filters. Filter drawer.




Lamp: Halogen cold light mirror lamp, 12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35Cord: approx. 1,80 m (6 ft.)Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35mm (39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)Distance between optical axis and columnbase: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)

Can be converted into a copy stand.

Scope of supply: Incl. compound negativecarrier, lamp and dust hood, without lens,without transformer.

210

4560/4471

4459

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 210

4560VPM 9005

Multigrade® enlarger for all film formats up to6 x 9 cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.) and lenses up to 105mm focal length.





4471VPM 7005

Multigrade® enlarger for all film formats up to6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.) and lenses up to 105mm focal length. Can be converted to a 6 x9 enlarger.





4530VPM 6005

Multigrade® enlarger for all film formats up to6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) and lenses up to80mm focal length. Can be converted to for-mats up to 6 x 9 cm.



4426VPM 3505

Multigrade® enlarger for 35 film (24 x 36 mm)and lenses up to 50 mm focal length. Can beconverted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with 35mm (24 x 36 mm) format masks.


211Lab

4530/4426

Multigrade is a registered trademark of Ilford Ltd.

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 211

B & W EnlargersSYSTEM-V


Lamp head with 75 W opal lamp, lamp adju-stable. Exchangeable double condensorsystem. Filter drawer.




Lamp: Opal lamp 75 W, E 27 socketCord: approx. 2.50 m (8 ft. 2 in.)Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35mm (39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)Distance between optical axis and columnbase: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)


Scope of supply: Incl. compound negativecarrier, lamp and dust hood, without lens.

212

4540/4470

4356

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 212

4540VP 9005

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 9cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.) and lenses up to 105 mmfocal length.





4470VP 7005

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.) and lenses up to 105 mmfocal length. Can be converted to a 6 x 9enlarger.





4465VP 6005

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 6cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.) and lenses up to 80mmfocal length. Can be converted to formats upto 6 x 9 cm.



4425VP 3505

B & W enlarger for 35 film (24 x 36 mm) andlenses up to 50 mm focal length. Can beconverted to formats up to 6 x 9 cm.

Compound negative carrier fitted with 35mm (24 x 36 mm) format masks.


213Lab

4465/4425

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:34 Uhr Seite 213

214

4401VP 350 B & W Enlarger For sizes up to 24 x 36 mm (35 mm film)

and lenses up to 50 mm focal length. Floorprojection possible. Removable compoundnegative carrier with negative masks for size24 x 36 mm and slide sizes 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2in.). Optically ground single condenser. Redfilter within bellows extension for dust pro-tection. Can accomodate filter drawer.Height adjustment by hand crank-operatedfriction drive on plastic bearings. Columnwith cm and inch scales.

The enlarger is convertible to sizes up to 6 x9 cm and to a Color or Multigrade enlarger.

Supplied with compound negative carrierand lamp, without lens.

Specifications:

Baseboard (WXDXH): approx. 400 x 420 x25 mm (15.7 x 16.5 x 1 in.)Height of column: approx. 760 mm (30 in.)Maximum enlargement on baseboard: 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 4.8 in.)Lamp: Opal lamp 75 WCord: ca. 2.50 m (8 ft. 2 in.)

4403AN Glass Insert Glass insert with specially etched contact

surface to prevent Newton rings.For insertion into the upper part of the com-pound negative carrier of the VP 350.

Dimensions: 50 x 52 mm (2 x 2 in.)

5421RA 2 XA Copy Adapter To convert the VP 350 to a copy stand.

Horizontally adjustable. 1/4“ camera thread.

4356

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 214

215215Lab

Autofocus technology in enlargers hasthe special advantage of greater speedas well as the most extreme precisionin focusing and has proven itself in theprofessional as well as the privatedarkroom.

Kaiser autofocus enlargers are able touse all enlarging lenses generally avai-lable with focal lengths of 50, 80 or 90mm without any modification – inclu-ding of course lenses already at hand.

The manufacturing deviation of theactual focal length from the nominalfocal length and the dependence of theeffective focal length on the reproduc-tion range can now be computed direct-ly by the enlarger. To do so each lens iscalibrated only once before the first use.The calibration values so determinedare permanently stored by pressing abutton. Then the necessary compensati-on factors are calculated electronicallyto keep the automatic autofocus adjust-ment absolutely exact, depending onthe effective focal length and the repro-duction range. Once they have beenentered, these setting values are per-manently stored for up to three focallengths and can be easily changed ifyou add or change your lens for another50, 80 or 90 mm lens. The control unitis equipped with a selector for a focallength of 50, 80 or 90 mm.

Since each focusing operation onlyapplies to a certain plane, with theseautofocus enlargers you can also allowfor different enlarging frame heights.

This compensation, too, is permanentlystored and is valid for all focal lengthswithout further calibrating.

Of course the units can be focusedmanually as well. When projecting on awall, compensating for distortion onScheimpflug principle or using lenstypes beyond the electronically registe-red focal lengths, a motor operated bytwo buttons on the control unit is usedto focus. The motor-operated remotecontrol is especially helpful with largeprojections: the sharpness is checkedin the focusing plane, while the controlunit with the long cable is directly nextto you.

All components of the SYSTEM-V canbe used on the AF enlargers and can also be used together with the automatic focusing to the extent that this is expedient.

Autofocus: Sharply Calculated

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 215

Autofocus EnlargersSYSTEM-V


Automatic focus adjustment by electronicautofocus facility with 50, 80 and 90 mmlenses. Convertible into 6 x 9 cm, autofocusis not possible with formats larger than 6 x 7cm. Basic calibration and manual operationby control device.

Removable compound negative carrier withinterchangeable inserts, adjustable maskingstrips, adjustable film stops and grid pins.Lens stage with spirit level and red filter, tilta-ble for distortion correction on Scheimpflugprinciple. Quick change attachment for len-ses. Height adjustment by hand-crank viatooth-bar with additional weight compensati-on by a roll-off spring mechanism. Wall andfloor projection possible.



Baseboard (WXDXH): approx. 600 x 500 x32 mm (23.6 x 19.7 x 1.3 in.)Column (HxWxD): approx. 1000 x 70 x 35mm (39.4 x 2.8 x 1.4 in.)Distance between optical axis and columnbase: approx. 220 mm (8.7 in.)Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

Scope of supply: Incl. control unit, com-pound negative carrier, lamp and dust hood,without lens.

216

4500

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 216

4500VCE 7005 AF

Color enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x 7cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.).

Color mixing head with dichroic interferencefilters, calibrated in densitometric values upto 180. Dials are indirectly illuminated. White-light lever for simultaneous swinging in or outof filters, with control light. Continuouslyadjustable density aperture up to 60 densito-metric densities (= two aperture settings).Best possible light distribution due to specialdiffusor plate and exchangeable double con-densor system. UV and IR filters. Filter dra-wer.



Can be converted into a copy stand or aslide duplicator.


Supplied without transformer.

4505VME 7005 AF

Multigrade® enlarger for all film formats up to6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.8 in.).

Multigrade® head with dichroic color filter foruse with variable gradation paper withoutchanging the exposure time. Scale dial indi-rectly illuminated with index numbers in halfsteps from 0 (extra soft) to 5 (extra hard) forstepless contrast control. White-light lever forsimultaneous swinging in or out of filters,with control light. Continuously adjustabledensity aperture up to 60 densitometric den-sities (= two aperture settings). Best possiblelight distribution due to special diffusor plateand exchangeable double condensorsystem. UV and IR filters. Filter drawer.





Supplied without transformer.

4510VPE 6005 AF

B & W enlarger for all film formats up to 6 x6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.).

Lamp head with 75 watt opal lamp, lampadjustable. Exchangeable double condensorsystem. Filter drawer.



Lamp: Opal lamp 75 W, E 27 socket.

217Lab

4505

4510

4356

4459

for4500/4505:

for 4510:

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 217

218

SYSTEM-V

VCE

7005

AF

4500

VME

7005

AF

4505

VPE

6005

AF

4510

VCP

9005

4550

VCP

7005

4480

VCP

6005

4460

VCP

3505

4420

VPM

900

545

60VP

M 7

005

4471

VPM

600

545

30VP

M 3

505

4426

VP 9

005

4540

VP 7

005

4470

VP 6

005

4465

VP 3

505

4425

also

for

use

with

pre

viou

sS

YS

TEM

-V m

odel

sal

so fo

r us

e w

ith V

P 3

50(4

401)

Base Boards and Accessories4472 Base Board 45 x 50 cm (17.7 x 19.7 in.) ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● –4413 Base Board 50 x 60 cm (19.7 x 23.6 in.) ● ● ● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ●● –4414 Base Board 60 x 80 cm (23.6 x 31.5 in.) ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –5508 Base Stand ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –

Columns and Accessories4473 Column w/o weight compensation, 1 m (40 in.) – – – ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● –4474 Column with weight compensation, 1 m (40 in.) – – – ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ●● –4475 Column w/toothed rack and fine drive, 1 m (40 in.) – – – ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4476 Column with toothed rack, 1 m (40 in.) – – – ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4408 Column with toothed rack, 1.2 m (47 in.) – – – ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4409 Column with weight compensation, 1.5 m (60 in.) – – – ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4412 Wall Mount ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4455 Extension Arm ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –

Enlarger Head Lower Part and Accessories4568 Enlarger Head Lower Part – – – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●● ●●

4422 Fine Drive – – – ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● – ●●

4423 Lens Holder Ring up to 50 mm focal length ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – –4424 Lens Holder Ring 60 – 105 mm focal length ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – –

Enlarger Heads and AccessoriesB&W Head, for formats up to 6 x 6 cm ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●●

4541 B&W Head, for formats up to 6 x 9 cm ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ●● ●●

4544 Color Head with Density Aperture ● ●● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●●

4545 Multigrade Head with Density Aperture ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●●

4451 Transformer with Voltage Stabilization ●● ●● – ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● – – – – ●● –4453 Transformer w/o Voltage Stabilization ●● ●● – ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● – – – – ●● –4356 Opal Lamp, 75 Watt – – ● – – – – – – – – ● ● ● ● ●● ●

4459 Halogen Cold Light Mirror Lamp ● ● – ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – – – ●● –Condensor Systems

4443 Double Condensor for formats up to 35 mm ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●●

4542 Double Condensor for formats up to 6 x 6 cm ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●●

Specs and More: A Survey

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 218

219219Lab

VCE

7005

AF

4500

VME

7005

AF

4505

VPE

6005

AF

4510

VCP

9005

4550

VCP

7005

4480

VCP

6005

4460

VCP

3505

4420

VPM

900

545

60VP

M 7

005

4471

VPM

600

545

30VP

M 3

505

4426

VP 9

005

4540

VP 7

005

4470

VP 6

005

4465

VP 3

505

4425

auch

für

älte

re S

YS

TEM

-VVe

rgrö

ßere

r ve

rwen

dbar

auch

für V

P 3

50 (

4401

)ve

rwen

dbar

Condensor SystemsDouble Condensor for formats up to 6 x 7 cm ● ● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ●●

4449 Double Condensor for formats up to 6 x 9 cm ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● – ●●

Compound Negative Carrier System4583 Compound Negative Carrier w/o Inserts ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – ●●

4493 Compound Negative Carrier with6x6 Mask/AN-Glass for Border Exposure ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● – ●●

4584 Compound Negative Carrier for 7 x 7 cm Slides ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● – ●●

4486 Pair of Format Masks 24 x 36 mm (35 mm) ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4491 Pair of Format Masks 24,5 x 36,5 mm, Border Exposure ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4431 Pair of Format Masks 4,5 x 6 cm ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4485 Pair of Format Masks 6 x 6 cm ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4436 Pair of Format Masks 6 x 7 cm ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4487 Pair of AN Glass Inserts ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4490 Pair of Flat Glass Inserts ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4433 Inserts AN Glass/Flat Glass ● ● ● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4435 Inserts 24 x 36 Mask/AN Glass ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● –4434 Inserts 6 x 6 Mask /AN Glass ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● –4432 Inserts 6 x 7 Mask/AN Glass ●● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● ● ●● ●● ●● –4489 Format Mask for 5 x 5 cm Slides ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4492 Pair of Panorama Format Masks 24 x 66 mm ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4494 Pair of Masks for own Cut-Out ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –

General Accessories4495 Filter Holder ● ● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ● ● ●● ●● ●● ●●

4496-99 Screw-On Filter Adapter ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● ●● –4448 Filter Drawer 85 x 85 mm ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●● ●●

All SYSTEM-V enlargers can be converted into copy stands using the components of the R1copy system (see pages 68-83).

● Standard equipment

●● Combination possible, additional compo-nents could be necessary

– Combination not possible

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 219

220

4473-76/4408-09Column Made of aluminium tubing, dull black anodized

surface, with cm and inch scales and markingsfor enlarging scales. With mount and fasteningfor lower part enlarger head 4568. Heightadjustment by hand crank.4473: Height adjustment by friction drive withplastic bearings, without weight compensation,height 1 m (40 in.)4474: Height adjustment by friction drive withplastic bearings, with weight compensation bybuilt-in roller-spring, height 1 m (40 in.)4475: Rack-and-pinion height adjustment, withweight compensation by built-in roller-spring,additional 1:10 fine drive. Locking screw forfixing the adjusted height. Height 1 m (40 in.).4476: same as 4475, but without fine drive.4408: Rack-and-pinion height adjustment, withweight compensation by built-in roller-spring.Locking screw for fixing the adjusted height.Height 1.2 m (47 in.).4409: Height adjustment by friction drive withplastic bearings, with weight compensation bybuilt-in roller-spring, Locking screw for fixingthe adjusted height. Height 1.5 m (60in.)

4472/4413-14Base Board Matt-gray base board with column base

fixed for attaching column. Spirit level incolumn base. Individually height-adjustablefeet.Dimensions (WxHxD):4472: approx. 450 x 28 x 500 mm

(17.7 x 1.1 x 19.7 in.)4413: approx. 600 x 32 x 500 mm

(23.6 x 1.3 x 19.7 in.)4414: approx. 800 x 32 x 600 mm

(31.5 x 1.3 x 23.6 in.)(Dimensions without base and feet)

5508Base Stand For converting all SYSTEM-V enlargers from

table to free-standing models. Also suitablefor all Kaiser base boards from 45 x 50 cmto 60 x 80 cm) (17.7 x 19.7 in. to 23.6 x31.5 in.). Height-adjustable feet


4409

4408

4476 4475 4474/73

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 220

221Lab

4412Wall Mount Strong wall mount for all Kaiser columns 70

mm (2.8 in.) wide. Required if projection isnot made on base board but on larger-sizedtable or the floor, especially to achieve largeenlarging scales.

Wall mounting with 6 screws. Upper partadjustable for absolutely vertical position.Lower part with base and spirit level andspace for transformer.

Maximum possible enlargement with lens f = 50 mm: 70 x 105 cm (27.5 x 41.3 in.) L = 29x, linear.

Entire height with 1 m (40 in.) column: 1.16 m (46 in.)

Supplied with screws and dowels.

4455Extension Arm To extend the holding arm on enlargers.

Required for large-dimension enlargements.This increases the distance between theoptical axis and the base by 80 mm (3.1 in.).The extension arm is attached between thestandard holding arm and the enlarger head.Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 115 x 60 x135 mm (4.5 x 2.4 x 5.3 in.)

4422Fine Drive For precise focusing. Two ratios (1:1 and

6:1). Upgradable on to all enlargers madefrom 10/94 (05 series).

4568Enlarger Head Lower Part Consists of condensor housing with bel-

lows and lens stage, without condensorsystem and compound negative carrier. Withlens adapter rings for lenses up to 50 mmand from 60 up to 105 mm focal lenght.Quick change attachment for easy lensmounting. Also required for converting Kaisercopy stands into enlargers.

70 cm(27.5 in.)

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 221

4544Color Head Suitable for all Kaiser enlargers. Dichroic

interference filters, calibration in densitome-tric units up to 180. Dials indirectly illumina-ted. White-light lever Continuously adjusta-ble, illuminated density aperture up to 60densitometric densities (= two aperture set-tings). Best possible light distribution due tospecial diffusor plate. UV filter and IR filter.Drawer for additional filter. May only be ope-rated with transformer 4451 and 4453. Supplied with halogen cold light mirror lamp(12 V, 100 W, socket GZ 6,35)Filter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)Cord: 1.8 m (6 ft.)Dimensions: approx. 160 x 250 x 125 mm(WxHxD) (6.3 x 5.9 x 8.8 in.)

4545Multigrade Head Suitable for all Kaiser enlargers. With dichroic

colour filter for processing variable contrastprinting papers without changing the exposu-re time. Indirectly illuminated scale dial calibra-ted in half steps from 0 (extra soft) to 5 (extrahard) for stepless gradation control. White-light lever for simultaneous swinging in andout of filters, with control light. Continuouslyadjustable, illuminated density aperture up to60 densitometric densities (= two aperturesettings). Best possible light distribution dueto special diffusor plate. UV filter and IR filter.Drawer for additional filter. May only be ope-rated with transformer 4451 and 4453. Supplied with halogen cold light mirror lamp(12 V, 100 W, socket 6,35). Same dimensionsas with 4544.

4541B & W Head Suitable for all Kaiser enlargers. Lamp adju-

stable. Drawer for additional filters. Suppliedwith opal lamp.

Specifications:

Lamp: Opal lamp, 75 WFilter drawer: 85 x 85 mm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)Cord: approx. 2,5 m (8.2 ft.)

with cord switchDimensions: 145 x 150 x 245 mm(WxHxD) (5.7 x 5.9 x 9.6 in.)

222

4459

4459

4356

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 222

223Lab

4451/4453Transformer Output power: 100 W


Available for 230 V, 240 V and 120 VFuse: 1,6 AT (230/240V) / 2,5 AT (120V)

4451: with starting-current limitation andelectronic voltage stabilization. For compen-sation of voltage deviations (for constantcolor temperature).Input: 230 V, + 10%, -15%, 50 HzOutput: 11,5 V ± 1%, 50 Hz

4453: without voltage stabilizationInput: 230 V, 50 HzOutput: 12 V, 50 Hz

4459Halogen Cold-Light Mirror Lamp 12 V, 100 W, 3200 K, average service life 50

hrs. Lamp with high light yield and constantlight radiation and color temperature duringthe entire service life. Low heat stress on the film due to the cold-light mirror.

4356Opal Lamp 75 W, E 27. Average service life 100 hrs.

Lamp with bright light output. Uniform lightdensity due to special inner coating of thebulb.Colour temperature: 3000 K

4443/4449/4542Double Condenser For SYSTEM-V enlargers. Simple fitting with

two coin screws on the head base.

4449: for formats up to 6 x 9 cm (2.4 x 3.5 in.).Fits all enlargers made from 10/94 on(05 series).

4542: for formats up to 6 x 6 cm (2.4 x 2.4 in.)4443: for formats up to 24 x 36 mm (35 mm). 4449

4542

4443

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 223

4583Compound Negative Carrier For use with all negative masks and glass

inserts size 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.).Suitable for all SYSTEM-V enlargers madefrom 10/94 on (05 series).

Adjustable guide pins for film widths 61,5mm (rollfilm 120), 41 mm (rollfilm 127) and35 mm film. Four steplessly adjustable mas-king strips for selecting the desired detail.Two grid pins at standard hole intervals.


4584 Compound Negative Carrierfor 7 x 7 cm Slides

For mounted 6 x 6 slides with outer dimen-sions 7 x 7 cm (2.8 x 2.8 in.). Suitable for allSYSTEM-V enlargers made from 10/94 on(05 series). Four steplessly adjustable mas-king strips for selecting the desired detail.


4493Compound Negative Carrier for Border Exposure 6 x 6 cm

For pictures with a black border. Comes with6 x 6 format mask for border exposure andAN glass.

Also for use with all negative masks andglass inserts size 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9in.). Suitable for all SYSTEM-V enlargersmade from 10/94 on (05 series).

Adjustable guide pins for film widths 61,5mm (rollfilm 120), 41 mm (rollfilm 127) and35 mm film. Four steplessly adjustable mas-king strips for selecting the desired detail.Two grid pins at standard hole intervals.


224

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 224

Format Masks and InsertsFor insertion into the 4583 compound nega-tive carrier of SYSTEM-V enlargers and for4493 compound negative carrier

Dimensions: approx. 100 x 72.5 mm (3.9 x 2.9 in.)

4431/36/85/86/91/92 Format Masks

Pairs of masks.

4486: Format masks 24 x 36 mm (35 mm)(a + b). With guide ridges for filmstrips and neg number read-out win-dow.

4491: Format masks 24,5 x 36,5 (a + b).For pictures with black border

4431: Format masks 4,5 x 6 cm4485: Format masks 6 x 6 cm4436: Format masks 6 x 7 cm4492: Panorama format masks 24 x 66 mm,

e.g. for Hasselblad X-pan, Noblex135 and Mamiya 7 with 35 mm panorama insert.

4432/4434-35 Anti-Newton Glass/Mask

Pairs of inserts.

4435: AN glass/format mask 24 x 36 (b)4434: AN glass/format mask 6 x 6 cm4432: AN glass/format mask 6 x 7 cm

4433/87/90 Glass Inserts

Pairs of inserts.

4487: AN glass4433: AN glass/flat glass4490: Flat glass

4489 Format Mask

For mounted 35 mm slides with 5 x 5 cm (2 x 2 in.) outer dimensions.

4494 Inserts

Without cut-out. For „do-it-yourself“ cut. 1 pair.

225Lab

4486

4485

4436

4489

4433, 4487, 4490

4431

4492

4494

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 225

226

4423-24Lens Holder Ring For the fast mounting of lenses on SYSTEM-V

enlargers made from 10/94 on (05 series).

4423: for lenses up to 50 mm focal lenght4424: for lenses from 60 to 105 mm focal

lenght

Rodenstock Enlarging Lenses

Rogonar: For enlarging scales up to 4:1. Foralmost all B&W work, can be used for colorenlarging with some restrictions.

Rogonar-S: Almost unlimited application in B& W enlarging, in color up to enlarging scalesof approx. 10:1.

Rodagon: Almost unlimited application forall B & W and color enlarging.

Apo-Rodagon N: For highest standards.Brilliant color reproduction with apochroma-tic correction.

Rodagon-WA: Wide-angle lens for highestperformance. For achieving large enlargingscales at normal distance to base board.

Schneider Enlarging Lenses

Componar-S: Optimum performance atenlargement scales around 8:1.

Componon-S: For highest demands and allenlarging scales.

Apo-Componon HM: Apochromatic cor-rected lens for highest demands and allenlarging scales.

4363 Rodagon-WA 4,0 40 mm 6 • • • 40,5 mm 24 x 36 mm43551) Rogonar 2,8 50 mm 3 - - • -43651) Rogonar-S 2,8 50 mm 4 • • • 40,5 mm43671) Rodagon 2,8 50 mm 6 • • • 40,5 mm44691) Apo-Rodagon N 2,8 50 mm 6 • • • 40,5 mm4328 Rodagon-WA 4,0 60 mm 6 • • • 40,5 mm 6 x 6 cm4360 Rogonar-S 4,5 75 mm 4 • • • 40,5 mm43411) Rodagon 4,0 80 mm 6 • • • 40,5 mm 6 x 7 cm43401) Apo-Rodagon N 4,0 80 mm 7 • • • 40,5 mm4327 Rodagon 5,6 105 mm 6 • • • 40,5 mm 6 x 9 cm4329 Apo-Rodagon N 4,0 105 mm 7 • • • 40,5 mm

4349 Apo-Componon HM 2,8 40 mm 6 • • • 43 mm 24 x 36 mm4336 Apo-Componon HM 4,0 45 mm 6 • • • 43 mm43251) Componar-S 2,8 50 mm 4 • - • 30 mm43821) Componon-S 2,8 50 mm 6 • • • 43 mm4350 Apo-Componon HM 4,0 60 mm 6 • • • 43 mm 6 x 6 cm43261) Componar-S 4,5 80 mm 4 • - • 30 mm43841) Componon-S 4,0 80 mm 6 • • • 43 mm 6 x 7 cm43371) Apo-Componon HM 4,5 90 mm 6 • • • 43 mm4338 Componon-S 5,6 100 mm 6 • • • 43 mm 6 x 9 cm

1) Suitable for Kaiser autofocus enlargersAll enlarging lenses with M 39 x 1 mounting thread.

Code no. Designation Lens Focal Ele- Filter max. filmspeed length ments thread format

clic

k-st

opdi

seng

agin

g

Ape

rtur

epr

eset

ting

Aper

ture

sca

leillu

min

ated

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 226

227Labor

4495 Filter Holder for Enlargers Device for positioning filters and masks

below the enlarging lens. For all Kaiser enlar-gers built after 1981. Mounted on verticalparallel rods. Height of filter tray steplesslyadjustable, can be swung out of line ofbeam. Two grooved insertion planes forsquare filter plates (for filters between 64 and67 mm (2.5 and 2.6 in.) width and 2 mm (.1 in.) max. thickness) and for adapters forscrew-on filters. One grooved insertion planefor masks, pinhole diaphragms etc. up to1.5 mm (.06 in.) max. thickness. Special holding device for framed filters for variablecontrast printing papers. Supplied with redfilter and diffusor plate for integral metering.

4496-99Screw-on Filter Adapter Allows for the use of screw-on filters with

filter holder 4495.

4496: for screw-on filter ø 49 mm (1.9 in.)4497: for screw-on filter ø 52 mm (2.0 in.)4498: for screw-on filter ø 55 mm (2.2 in.)4499: for screw-on filter ø 58 mm (2.3 in.)

4417Gray Filter For use in 4495 Filter Holder.

Reduces light intensity by two apertureincrements. Filter factor 4.

Dimensions: 67 x 67 mm (2.6 x 2.6 in.)

4448 Filter Drawer For all Kaiser enlargers. For filter inserts size

8.5 x 8.5 cm (3.3 x 3.3 in.)

4437Heat Filter For the protection of negatives and acetate

or gelatine filters in B & W enlargers againstheat stress during continuous operation. Fitsin suitable filter drawers.

Dimensions: approx. 70 x 70 mm (2.8 x 2.8 in.).

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 227

4996Darkroom Kit „Color“

Includes:

– VCP 3505 color enlarger for 35 mm filmswith transformer and SchneiderComponar-S 2.8/50 enlarging lens

– „spectral 590“ safelight– ATU 160 exposure timer– 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame– two chemical storage bottles– three lab trays– three stainless steel print tongs– a thermometer– 30 sheets of RA-4 color printing paper– print kit for color

4997Darkroom Kit „Multigrade®“

Includes:

– VP 3505 B & W enlarger for 35 mm filmswith Multigrade filter kit and Rodenstock2.8/50 mm enlarging lens

– safelight with Multigrade filter– 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame– two chemical storage bottles– three lab trays– two print tongs– a tray thermometer– 25 sheets of 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7“)

Multigrade paper– Multigrade developer and fixer

228

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 228

4999B & W Darkroom Kit

Includes:

– VP 6005 B & W enlarger for formats up to6 x 6 cm with additional 35 mm formatmasks and Rodenstock Rogonar 2.8/50mm enlarging lens

– exposure timer– 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame– safelight– three lab trays– two print tongs– a thermometer– two bottles

8902Basic B & W Darkroom Kit

Includes:

– VP 350 B & W enlarger with RodenstockRogonar 2.8/50 mm enlarging lens

– safelight– 18 x 24 cm (7 x 10“) masking frame– two bottles– three lab trays– two print tongs– a thermometer

229Lab

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 229

230

The enlarger is the most importantdevice in the darkroom. But in additionthere is a wide range of supplementarytools to make exposing photographicpaper easier and more reliable. Thebasic equipment should at least com-prise a safelight for a „safe“ basic illu-mination, a masking frame or easel forholding the photographic paper and atimer to control the exposure time. Acombined exposure timer and meter is

even more convenient, because itmakes determining of the correct expo-sure time much easier. If you do colorprinting, you would eventually appre-ciate the advantages of a color analy-zer. Contact printer, test printer andfocus magnifier round off the equip-ment.

Tools for Picture-Makers

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 230

231231Lab

Developing the exposed photo paperrequires lab trays (a minimum ofthree), print tongs, bottles for photochemicals, graduates and beakers tomeasure and mix the chemicals, a pro-cess timer, a thermometer and a dry-ing rack as basic equipment.

Buying a print washer is a very goodidea. Dish warmer, digital thermometerand print wipers make things evenmore convenient.

If you also want to do your own filmdeveloping, you will also need a deve-loping tank with a self-loading reel,bottles, graduates and funnels for thephoto chemicals, a thermometer, aprocess timer, film clips to hang up wetfilms and a pair of scissors.

Some basic knowledge is indispensible– there are many useful books – andsome exercise is also needed. For thisyou will need time. The reward for yourefforts are pictures which in their ownway are unique and which bear thedistinctive hand of their „maker“.

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:35 Uhr Seite 231

4702-06„promask“ Professional Masking Frame

Margin stop with preclamping device, formatmarkings and sinkable grid pins for centeredpositioning of photo paper. Grid pins at stan-dard hole intervals. Frame made of non-war-ping moulded aluminium. Scales in cm andinch. Pneumatic spring with end positiondamping. Raised frame stays open. Four sli-ding masking strips with fast adjustment andfine setting by friction drive, lockable. Borderwidth adjustable from 2 to 45 mm (0.08 to1.8 in.). Each strip ist individually adjustable.Light grey base plate. Non-slip rubber feet.

4702: For formats up to 24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x12 in.) Dimensions: 524 x 70 x 468mm (20.6 x 2.8 x 18.4 in.)

4704: For formats up to 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16in.) Dimensions: 630 x 70 x 515 mm(24.8 x 2.8 x 18.4 in.)

4705: For formats up to 40 x 50 cm (16 x 20in.) Dimensions: 725 x 70 x 620 mm(28.5 x 2.8 x 24.4 in.)

4706: For formats up to 50 x 60 cm (20 x 24in.) Dimensions: 830 x 70 x 718 mm(32.7 x 2.8 x 28.3)

4708„topmask“ Masking Frame

For formats up to 24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x 12 in.)Metal masking frame with cm and inch sca-les. Two bilaterally guided masking bandswith instant lock push buttons. Pneumaticspring with end position damping, raisedframe stays open. Two separately adjustablemargins for borders from 5 to 25 mm (0.2 to1 in.). Automatic paper clamping when clo-sing masking frame. Base plate made fromheavy-duty hardboard with light grey coatingto prevent reflections. Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 460 x 45 x400 mm (18.1 x 1.8 x 15.7 in.)

232

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 232

4001Masking Frame24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x 12 in.)

Metal base plate with non-slip base and dullwhite surface. Adjustable margins for bor-ders from 5 to 12 mm (0.2 to 0.5 in.). Metaldull black masking frame with cm and inchscales and snap paperholding mechanism.Bilaterally guided self-adjusting maskingbands with instant-lock push buttons.Maximum print size 28 x 36 cm (11 x 14.2 in.).

Dimensions: (WxHxD): approx. 470 x 30 x 395 mm (18.5 x 1.2 x 15.6 in.)

4000 Masking Frame18 x 24 cm (7 x 9 1/2 in.)

Metal base plate with non-slip base and dullwhite surface. Adjustable margins for bordersfrom 5 to 12 mm (0.2 to 0.5 in.). Plastic dullblack masking frame with cm and inch scales.Bilaterally guided self-adjusting maskingbands. Maximum print size: 19 x 24,5 cm(11.8 x 1.4 x 10.8 in.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 330 x 25 x 275 mm (13 x 1 x 10.8 in.)

4004Borderless Masking Frame

For formats up to 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.).Metal base plate with non-slip base and dullwhite surface. Printed symmetrical cm scale(zero point in centre). Format markings for 7 x 10, 9 x 13, 10 x 15, 13 x 18, 18 x 24,20 x 25 and 30 x 40 cm (3 x 4, 3 1/2 x 5, 4 1/8 x 5 7/8, 5 x 7, 7 x 9 1/2, 8 x 10 and12 x 16 in.). Paper stop at top of base. Twopermanently magnetic formed-plastic paperholding bars. The stop profiles are taperedto prevent paper edges from bendingupward.

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 490 x 25 x 325 mm (19.3 x 1 x 12.8 in.)

233Lab

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 233

234

4008Contact Printing Frame For the simultaneous printing of max. 6 film

strips each with six 35 mm negatives or 7film strips each with five 35 mm negatives onone sheet sized 20 x 25 cm (8 x 10 in.).Hinged glass plate with retaining clips for filmstrips. Also variable clamping bar for shortfilm strips. Base plate with plastic foam pad-ding and non-slip feet.


4009 Test Printer For producing test strips to determine expo-

sure time and filter setting for enlargements.Top with six separately opened shutters.Turning the paper around after the first expo-sure makes a total of 12 exposures possibleon one sheet of 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7 in.)

Dimensions: approx. 180 x 160 mm (7.1 x 6.3 in.)

4005„focuscop“ Focus Magnifier For reliable focus control in enlarging. Double

lens system with 4 x magnification. Focuscontrol using both eyes. Bright, distortion-free image on focussing screen, wide vie-wing angle.


4378–79Test Negative For exact focussing in enlarging.

4378: 24 x 36 mm (35 mm)4379: 6 x 6/6 x 7 cm (2.4 x 2.4/2.4 x 2.8 in.)

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 234

235Lab

6361Antistatic Cloth Lint-free,especially treated cloth.


6363Special Antistatic Cloth High-grade lint-free cloth with chainstitched

border for cleaning and antistatic treatmentof films, glass, and lenses. Also suitable forphonograph records, plastic parts and pla-stic-coated surfaces.


6317 „Clear Gear“ Compressed Air For touch-free dust removal from optical, fine

mechanical and electronic equipment andcomponents. Without CFC, 100 % non-flammable.

Contents: 200 ml, min.150 g (6.8 floz, min. 5.3 oz.)

6362/65/67Cotton Gloves To prevent fingerprints on prints, negatives

optical glass, etc. 100 % cotton, washableat all temperatures.

6362: One pair, size 15 6365: One pair, size 12 (standard size)6367: Three pairs, size 12

4065Lab Apron Acid-resistant and washable, made of light

pleasant-to-wear material, with seamededges. Matt black with pocket.

Length: approx. 1 m (40 in.)Width: approx. 70 cm (28 in.)

6318

9 x 6317

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 235

4221 „duka 50“ Darkroom Safelight

Lab light with sodium spectral lamp for allcolour negative, colour positive and black-and-white processes. The light released is ina tight spectral range of around 589 nm(sensitivity gap for most colour papers). Extrafilter for processing variable-contrast papersincluded. High lighting power. The brightnesscan be adjusted steplessly to suit the roomconditions and paper speed. The light headcan be pivoted for direct or indirect lighting.Usable as table and wall light. Lamp inclu-ded. Cord: approx. 2 m (6 1/2 ft.)


4222Sodium Spectral Lamp

For „duka 50“ darkroom safelight.10 watt. Average life approx. 1000 hours.

4224 „duka 5“ Darkroom Safelight

Safelight with power-saving Dulux fluores-cent lamp. For fast variable-contrast pap-ers and all other black and white papers.High lighting strength, even illumination.Light head pivots for direct and indirectlighting. Useable as table- and wall light.Lamp included. Cord: approx. 2 m (6 1/2 ft.)

Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 195 x 250 x 140 mm (7.7 x 9.8 x 5.5 in)

4229 Fluorescent Lamp

For „duka 5“ darkroom safelight.5 watt. Average life approx. 8000 hours.

236

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 236

237Lab

4220„spectral 590“ Darkroom Safelight Illumintes a broad area with 20 selected

LED’s especially adapted to negative-posi-tive processes. The emitted light lies in thenarrow spectral range around 590 nm inwhich most colour papers are insensitive.Also suited to variable contrast printingpaper. Adjustment knob for controllingbrightness. Removable special filter for grea-ter brightness in the B & W lab. Dull blackhousing. Top can be tilted from 0 to 40°.Mounting on wall can be done for direct orindirect lighting of working area.

Cord: approx. 1.8 m (6 ft.)Dimensions: approx. 150 x 110 x 90 mm

(5.9 x 4.3 x 3.5 in.)

4018Darkroom Safelight Dull black plastic housing. Top tiltable from

0 to 40°. Can be used as wall or table-toplight. Mounting on wall can be done eitherfor direct or indirect lighting of working area.With 9 x 12 cm (3.5 x 4.7 in.) filter forMultigrade papers and graded B&W papers.

Lamp: 15 W, E 14Cord with cord switch: approx. 1.8 m (6 ft.)Dimensions: approx. 140 x 110 x 90 mm

(5.5 x 4.3 x 3.5 in.)

Supplied with lamp.

4013–15Safelight Filter Size 9 x 12 cm (3.5 x 4.7 in.), for 4018 dark-

room safelight.4013: Orange, for B&W silver chlorobromide

papers4014: Red, for orthochromatic papers and

films and B&W graded papers.4015: Multigrade, for variable contrast

papers and B&W graded papers

4227Darkroom Lamp Red. 15 W, 220 V, E 27.

Can be used together with clamp-on lampholder, for example.

2008

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 237

4025„trialux“ Automatic ElectronicExposure Meter

Timer with exposure and contrast metering.Simple determination of illumination in lux.For B&W and color negatives and slides.

Exposure timer: Time count-down to zero,the reset to starting time (can be repeatedas often as needed for serial exposures).Interruption and restart of remaining timeand interruption with direct reset to the star-ting time are possible. Focusing light switch.

Exposure reading: Single-spot or multi-spotreadings with averaging of max. five spots.Instantaneous display of readings. The paperindex is determined and displayed digitally inlux deconds. Blue-cell silicon diode withcolor-corrected and linear characteristicsover the entire time scale. insensitive to theeffect of daylight.

Compact design: the metering diode is inte-grated in the control panel. Consequently for

ease of use the LED display and the controlpanel are also in the enlarger beam duringraeding, and an extra and possibly troublesome light source is not necessary. The power pack is connected to the mete-ring and control units by a flexible cable of150 cm (60 in.) length.

Specifications:Time range: 0,1 - 999,9 secReading range at index 5 (maximum range): 0,1 - 999,9 secIndex range: 0,01 - 99,9 luxsec.Reading sensitivity: 0,005 - 50 luxFuse in power pack: 2,5 ATSwitching capacity: 500 WPower consumption: approx. 3,2 WDimensions:

Reading and control unit: approx. 142 x 78 x 22 mm

(5.6 x 3.1 x 0.9 in.)Power pack: approx. 157 x 77 x 50 mm

(6.2 x 3 x 2 in.)Cord: approx. 2 m (6.5 ft.)

4214 „Automatic Timer cpd 2“ ElectronicExposure Meter and Timer

Exposure timer and exposure meter for B & W and colour negatives and slides.

Selective or integral exposure metering usinga separate probe with color-corrected siliconphoto element and attachable collectinglens. Three-digit digital display. Start buttonand Ready display. Elapsed time runs back-wards to zero. Interruption and restarting theremaining time as well as interruption withdirect reset to the given time is possible.Can also be used as an exposure timer withmanual time setting. Set time using the Stepup/Step down buttons.

Additional power outlet for safelight in push-pull switching mode (not suitable for „duka50“ safelight).

Switching capacity: 500 wattTime range: 0,1 ... 999 secIndex range: 0,1 ... 99,9 luxsecFuse: 2,5 AT (at 230/240 V)

5 AT (at 120 V)Cord: approx. 2 m (6.5 ft.)

238

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 238

4030„digital timer“ Electronic Exposure Timer

Time range: 0.1 - 99 secondsDisplay: 0.1 - 9.9 seconds in 10th sec.

increments, and 10-99seconds in sec. increments

Maximum switching capacity: 500 WDimensions: approx. 100 x 75 x 152 mm

(3.9 x 3 x 6 in.)Power cable: 2 m (6 ft 7 in.)

2-digit amber-colored display. Time settingswith step-up/step-down keys. Time count-down to zero, then reset to starting time(can be repeated any number of times forexposure series). Interrupt and restart ofremaining time, and interruption with directreset to the set starting time are likewisepossible. Focusing light switch. Matt black housingmade of impact resistant plastic.

Operation by way of four large pushbuttonsthat can be easily located in the dark.

4021/24ATU 160 / MT 60 Exposure Timer Powered by snychromotor for time

intervals between 1 and 60 seconds. Timeset with a knurled knob. Wide start key. Theset time can be repeated any number oftimes for exposure series. Timing can beinterrupted. Focusing light switch. Matt blackhousing made of impact-resistant plastic.Luminescent scale. Max. switching capacity: 500 W

ATU 160 (4021) with red follow-pointer indicating how much time has elapsed.

Dimensions: approx. 100 x 81 x 152 mm(3.9 x 3.2 x 6 in.)

Power cable: 2 m (6 ft. 7 in.)

4029cpa 3 Color Analyzer 4-channel color analyser for assessing exact

filtration. Suitable for processing colour andcolour reversal papers. Selective or averagemetering. Swivel measuring head with 5 mm(0.2 in.) measuring point and channel switch.Insensitive to darkroom safelight. Digital display of filtration values in densitometricdensities of 0 to ±300. Mechanically adjust-able memory for storage without power supply.

Measuring range log. density: ±3.5.Complete with diffuser and screwdriver.

Dimensions: (WxHxD): approx. 170 x 60 x155 mm (6.7 x 2.4 x 6.1 in.)

Cord: 1.7 m (5 ft. 7 in.)

239Lab

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 239

240

4218Digital Lab Timer Four-figure LCD display for minutes and

seconds. Count-down. Time preset up tomax. 99 minutes 59 seconds. Acoustic sig-nal for count-down to zero. Interruption pos-sible. Set starting time retrievable. Magneton the back for simple fixing to metal surfa-ces. Including button battery:1.5 V, type G-5.

Dimensions: approx. 88 x 14 x 46 mm(3.5 x .6 x 1.8 in.)

4219Process Timer Three independent channels for separate

timing, in addition clock, alarm and calendarfunctions. Time preset up to max. 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds. Acoustic signalfor count-down to zero. Set starting timesretrievable. Interruption possible. Countsupwards after count-down to zero. Variousaccoustic signals for simple indentification ofdifferent channels. Holder clip for pocket orbelt, folding stand foot and magnet for fixingto metal surfaces. Including button battery:1.5 V, type G-13. Dimensions: approx. 82 x15 x 70 mm (3.2 x .6 x 2.8 in.)

4026Gradation Calculator Calculator disk to determine the correct

gradation.

4091„digi-thermo F“ Digital Thermometer

Battery-powered all-purpose thermometerwith LCD display. Four-figure temperaturedisplay, switchable from °C to °F. Fast andnormal temperature reading option (readinginterval 2 sec. and 10 sec.). Settable mini-mum and maximum temperature, acousticsignal if exceeded or below. Count-downtimer. Time interval up to 99 hrs. 59 min.max. Stainless steel temperature sensorwith 1 m cable. With pocket clip, hangereyelet and stand bracket. Reading range:-50° ... +260° C (-58 ° ... +500° F)Battery: 1.5 V Micro/AAA (included)Dimensions approx.105 x 19 x 66 mm(without sensor): (4.1 x .7 x 2.6 in.)

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 240

241Lab

4080Developing Tank Thermometer Alcohol-filled. Unbreakable plastic stem. With

centigrade and Fahrenheit scales: 0 to 50°C/32 to 120° F.With marker at 18° C/64 ° F.Length: 130 mm (5.1 in.); ø 12 mm (.4 in.)

4084Floating Thermometer With lead weight to ensure vertical position

in the liquid and measurement under thesurface. Alcohol-filled bulb. Centigrade andFahrenheit scales: 0 ... 50°C/32 ... 120°F.With marking at 18°C/64°F.Length: 130 mm (5.1 in.), ø 11 mm (.4 in.)

4086Precision Thermometer Especially suited for color processing.

Alcohol-filled bulb. Luminous blue capillary.Scale from 10 to 50° C, calibrated in stepsof .2 degrees, margin of error ± .2°. Max.immersion depth 60 mm (2.4 in.). Length: 195 mm (7.7 in., ø 12 mm (.5 in.)

4062Print Tongs Made of chemical-resistant plastic; self- ope-

ning. Molded tray edge recess. One pair ofdifferent-coloured print tongs. Length: 160 mm (6.3 in.)

4081Developing Tank Thermometer Alcohol-filled. With centigrade and Fahren-

heit scales: 0 to 50° C/32 to 120° F.With marker at 18° C/64° F.Length: 130 mm (5.1 in.), ø 11 mm (.4 in.)

4083Tray Thermometer With angled stem and hook for hanging it on

tray’s edge. Alcohol-filled bulb. Centigradeand Fahrenheit scales: 0 ... 50° C/32 ... 120°F. With marking at 18°C/64°F. Length: 85mm + 45 mm of angled stem (3.3 + 1.8 in.),ø 10 mm (.4 in.)

4067Print Tongs Stainless steel, insensitive to photochemi-

cals. With spiral spring and catch for han-ging on side of tray. With protective capsespecially designed for working with plastic-coated papers. Length: 150 mm (6 in.) 2 pieces.

4059Print Tongs and Clamp Print tongs made of chemical-resistant pla-

stic, self-opening. Molded tray-edge recess.Can also be used as film or print clamp.Length: 180 mm (7.1 in.) Set of two.

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 241

242

Lab TraysMade of shock-resistant plastic. Acid- proof.Heat resistant up to 80° C (176° F). Groovedbottom enhances removal of paper andensures best possible flow for chemicals andstability. With pouring lip. 4171 - 73 withrecess for tray thermometer.

4140-41Dish Warmer All-metal housing in a black stoved-

enamelled finish. Adjustable thermostat for automatic temperature control.ON/OFF switch and control light.Power cable: approx. 2 m (6 ft. 7 in.)

Heating capacity: 300 WattControl range: approx. 20 - 45°C

(68 - 113 °F)Tolerance: approx. ±0.5°

4140: for one dish up to 24 x 30 cm (9.4 x 11.8 in.) or two dishes 13 x 18 cm (5.1 x 7.1 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 250 x60 x 340 mm (9.8 x 2.4 x 13.4 in.)

4141: for one dish up to 30 x 40 cm (11.8 x 15.7 in.) or two dishes 20 x 25 cm (7.9 x 9.8 in.)Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 310 x60 x 450 mm (12.2 x 2.4 x 17.7 in.)

13 x 18 cm / 5 x 7“ 4151 4152 4153 235 x 185 x 50 / 9.3 x 7.3 x 220 x 25 cm / 8 x 10“ 4156 4157 4158 325 x 260 x 65 / 12.8 x 10.2 x 2.624 x 30 cm / 91/2 x 12“ 4166 4167 4168 375 x 315 x 70 / 14.8 x 12.4 x 2.830 x 40 cm / 12 x 16“ 4171 4172 4173 460 x 360 x 85 / 18.1 x 14.2 x 3.340 x 50 cm / 16 x 20“ 4176 4177 4178 580 x 490 x 95 / 22.8 x 19.3 x 3.750 x 60 cm / 20 x 24“ 4181 4182 4183 695 x 575 x 115 / 27.4 x 22.6 x 4.550 x 70 cm / 20 x 271/2 4186 4187 4188 790 x 585 x 105 / 31.1 x 23 x 4.1

For sizes up to White Black Red Dimensions(LxWxH):approx. mm/in

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:36 Uhr Seite 242

243Lab

4192-95Chemical Storage Bottle Made of polyathylene, unbreakable and

acid-proof. With screw cap and blank label.

4192: 1000 ml, white4193: 1000 ml, black4194: 2000 ml, white4195: 2000 ml, black

4198-99Accordion Bottle For photochemicals. Black. The accordion-

like walls can be pressed together, settingexcess air free. This reduces the danger ofoxidation and allows for longer storage ofchemicals.With screw-on cap.

4198: 550-1000 ml4199: 900-2000 ml

4250-55Graduate Made of Chemical-resistant polypropylene.

Temperature-resistante up to 95 °C (203 °F).With pouring lip and wide base for steadystand. Graduated scale.

Content Scale steps Height mm/in

4250: 50 ml 1 ml 150/6 4252: 100 ml 2 ml 160 /6.34253: 250 ml 5 ml 195 /7.74254: 500 ml 10 ml 220/8.74255: 1000 ml 20 ml 285/11.2

4256-57Graduated Beaker Made of chemical-resistant plastic.

Temperature-resistant in excess of 80 °C(176 °F). With pouring lip and scale.

Content Scale steps Height mm/in4256: 1000 ml 10 ml 150/5.9 4257: 2000 ml 20 ml 215/8.5

4243Funnel For handling photochemicals. Made of non-

brehemical-resistant polyethyakable clene.Ribbed barrel to prevent airlocks and facilita-te fast pouring.Diameter: 120 mm (4.7 in)Height: 170 mm (6.7 in.)

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr Seite 243

4296„Standard“ Developing Tank With adjustable self-winding reel for film size

135 (35 mm), 126, 127, 120 or 220 (rollfilm). Tank and reel made of nonbreakableplastic. Quick-drain outlet. Capacity: one film size 135 (35 mm) or

two films size 126 or twofilms size 127 or one film size220 or two films size 120.

Max. quantity: 500 ml.Dimensions: ø 100 mm (3.9 in.), height

approx. 160 mm (6.3 in.)Additional reel 4298 available.

4297„Universal“ Developing Tank With two adjustable self-winding reels. For

film sizes 135 (35 mm), 126, 127, 120 or220 (roll film) . Tank and reels made of non-breakable plastic. Quick-drain outlet.

Capacity: two films size 135 (35 mm) orfour films size 126 or twofilms size 127 or one film size220 or two films size 120.

Max. quantity: 650 ml.Dimensions: ø 100 mm (3.9 in.), height

approx. 160 mm (6.3 in.)

4263Film Washing Hose For fast and thorough film washing. Fits all

Kaiser developing tanks and almost all waterfaucets.

Length: approx. 55 cm (22 in.)

244

4298 Self-Winding Reel For films size 135 (35 mm), 126, 127, 120 or

220. Fits 4296 and 4297 developing tanks.

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr Seite 244

4299Negative Lab Set

Contains all items required for B & W develo-ping.

Includes: Film wiper 4070, Tank thermometer 4081, Film clips 4117, Chemical storage bottle 1000 ml,white, 4192Chemical storage bottle 1000 ml,black, 4193 Funnel ø 120 mm 4243 Graduate 250 ml 4253, “Standard“ developing tank 4296

4094–95PE/RC Print Washer

For quick and thorough washing of plastic-coated papers. With connecting hose of 1 m(3.3 ft.) length and hose clip for attaching towater outlet.

4094: for formats up to 30 x 40 cm (12 x 16in.) Capacity approx. 4 l Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 460 x85 x 360 mm (18.1 x 3.3 x 14.2 in.)

4095: for formats up to 40 x 50 cm (16 x20 in.) Capacity approx. 9,5 l Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 580 x95 x 490 mm (22.8 x 3.7 x 19.3 in.)

245Lab

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr Seite 245

246

4042Double-Sided Print Dryer For baryta paper up to size 30 x 40 cm

(12 x 16 in.). With aluminium drying surfacesand automatic tightening of covering cloth.Temperature cna be adjusted between 20and 80 °C (68 and 176 °F). Uniform distribu-tion of warmth and high temperature con-stancy even in continuous operation.

Heating power: 200 WCord: approx. 1.7 m (5 ft. 7 in.) Dimensions (WxHxD): approx. 460 x 85 x 380 mm (18.1 x 3.3 x 15 in.)

4048Drying Rack For air-drying of plastic-coated paper

(PE/RC papers). For five 30 x 40 cm (12 x16 in.) or 24 x 30 cm (9 1/2 x 12 in.) printsor ten 20 x 25 cm (8 x 10 in.) prints or moreprints of smaller size.

Required space: approx. 32 x 22.5 cm (12.6 x 8.9 in.)

Height: approx. 25 cm ((9.8 in.)

4056Roller Squeegee For squeezing off excess water from plastic-

coated papers. Also suitable for blister-freerolling of prints on glazing pressures and formounting photographs on particle boardsetc. Handy plastic handle. Roller made ofmoulded PVC, 180 mm (7.1 in.) wide, ø 26 mm (1 in)

Dimensions: approx. 190 x 50 x 140 mm(7.5 x 2 x 5.5 in.)

4047Replacement Drying Cloth For double-sided print dryer 4042.

30 x 40 cm (12 x 16 in.)

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr Seite 246

247Lab

4074Print Wiper For wiping off excess water from plastic-

coated paper and sheet films. Contouredplastic handle with soft blade.

Length: 300 mm (11.8 in.)

4125Film Cartridge Opener For opening 35-mm film cartridges.

Dimensions: approx. 140 x 40 x 40 mm (5.5 x 1.6 x 1.6 in.)

For film leader retriever, film cartridges andDX labels see page 248.

4070Film Wiper With four-fold soft rubber blades, 70 mm

(2.8 in.) wide. Completely harmless to film.For film widths up to 60 mm (2.4 in.).

Length: 160 mm (6.3 in.)

4117Film Clips For hanging up wet films. 3-hole clip mecha-

nism. Plastic with stainless steel spring.1 clip with and 1 without weight

Dimensions: approx. 27 x 83 x 14 mm (1.1 x 3.3 x .6 in.)

4120Film Clips For hanging up wet films. 2-hole clip mecha-

nism. Stainless steel model. 1 clip with and 1 without weightDimensions: approx. 25 x 85 (50) x 25 mm

(1 x 3.3 (2) x 1 in.)

6689Lab Scissors Made of fibreglass-reinforced nylon; blades

of special heat-treated stainless steel.

Length: 18 cm (7.1 in.)

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr Seite 247

248


in daylight. For bulk film material up to 30 m(98 ft.). With frame counter and remaining-film meter.


4124/27Film Cartridges For 35-mm film. For self-loading with bulk

film material. Clamp fastener on reel axle.

4124: metal type, 5 pcs.4127: plastic type, 5 pcs.

4128DX Labels For coding film cartridges with self-loaded

film or changing existing codings. Consistingof three sheets of adhesive labels (each with10 labels) made of special conductive foiland one sheet of insulating labels in differentsizes.

4132Film Leader Retriever For extracting 35 mm film leader from car-

tridges into which the film has been wound.Plastic casing with one fixed and one slidingtongue. Simple use.

13_Lab 25.06.2004 12:37 Uhr Seite 248

all dished up shooting tables are among the most

Documents

shooting table obvious

classic shooting tableor

basic table

background paper

tabletop photography

uhr seite

cardboard background

background forthe subject